WO2022165665A1 - Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium - Google Patents

Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022165665A1
WO2022165665A1 PCT/CN2021/075049 CN2021075049W WO2022165665A1 WO 2022165665 A1 WO2022165665 A1 WO 2022165665A1 CN 2021075049 W CN2021075049 W CN 2021075049W WO 2022165665 A1 WO2022165665 A1 WO 2022165665A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal group
terminal
terminal device
information
offset information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/075049
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
黄钧蔚
Original Assignee
深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 深圳传音控股股份有限公司 filed Critical 深圳传音控股股份有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2021/075049 priority Critical patent/WO2022165665A1/en
Priority to CN202180091939.1A priority patent/CN116965106A/en
Publication of WO2022165665A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022165665A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/02—Power saving arrangements

Definitions

  • an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a terminal device, including: acquiring terminal group offset information, optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs ; Based on the terminal group offset information, determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
  • the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
  • the information processing method may further include: receiving a reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a terminal device, including: receiving target information, where the target information carries indication information of a terminal group; confirming whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally Preferably, the target terminal group is determined based on the terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; if so, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group.
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
  • Non-access stratum signaling includes
  • the radio resource control signaling includes at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling, or radio resource control recovery signaling.
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
  • the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period is the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing apparatus, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
  • Non-access stratum signaling includes
  • processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
  • the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period is the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing apparatus, which is applied to network equipment, including:
  • the judgment module is used to judge whether the preset parameters of the terminal equipment meet the preset conditions; if so, the trigger processing module determines the terminal group offset information of the terminal equipment according to the preset parameters, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the belonging of the terminal equipment. terminal group.
  • the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
  • the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
  • the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
  • the preset parameter is a relevant parameter of the communication behavior related to the terminal device
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
  • Non-access stratum signaling includes
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
  • a terminal device for implementing the method according to any one of the first aspect or the second aspect
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, the computer program is stored in a readable storage medium, the processor can read the computer program from the readable storage medium, and the processor executes the A computer program implements any of the methods described above.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is an architectural diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • a network device also known as a RAN (radio access network, radio access network) device, is a device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, which can be an evolved base station in an LTE (Long Term Evolution, Long Term Evolution) system (evolutional node B, eNB or eNodeB), or relay station or access point, or base station in 5G (5th Generation mobile networks or 5th Generation wireless systems, 5th-Generation, fifth-generation mobile communication technology) network, such as transmission and reception Point (transmission and reception point, TRP), controller, etc., are not limited here.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution, Long Term Evolution
  • eNB Long Term Evolution
  • 5G 5th Generation mobile networks or 5th Generation wireless systems, 5th-Generation, fifth-generation mobile communication technology
  • TRP transmission and reception Point
  • controller etc.
  • RRC_INACTIVE in the 5G NR (New Radio, new radio) system, in order to meet the new business characteristics, and consider the power consumption of UE (User Equipment, terminal equipment), compared with 4G LTE system, defined A new RRC (Radio Resource Control, Radio Resource Control) state.
  • the network device After the terminal device accesses the network and completes this data transmission, the network device does not directly let the terminal device release the radio resource control connection and enter the idle state (or "idle state", RRC_IDLE), but configures the terminal device by the network device. into an inactive state. After the terminal device enters the inactive state, it does not perform data transmission with the network device, but can periodically receive paging from the network device.
  • the network device retains the configuration of the radio resource control connection established by the terminal device, the configuration of the bearer, the security configuration, and the parameter configuration of the n2 interface (the interface between the 5G core network and the base station) related to the terminal device.
  • the terminal device also needs to save RRC connection configuration, bearer configuration and security configuration, etc. Since both the terminal device and the network device have the RRC connection configuration parameters of the terminal device, the terminal device in the inactive state can use the saved RRC connection configuration parameters to quickly access the network device for data transmission when there is data transmission. transmission.
  • the network device instructs the terminal device to enter the inactive state through RRC release (RRC release) signaling.
  • Paging when there is data on the network side that needs to be sent to the terminal device, or when there are system information changes and ETWS (Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System, Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System)/CMAS (Commercial Mobile Alert Service, commercial mobile alerts) service) indication, the network device is allowed to page the terminal device in idle state or inactive state or connected state (RRC_CONNECTED).
  • the paging indicator (Paging indicator) is scrambled with P-RNTI (Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier, Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier) on the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel, Physical Downlink Control Channel), and through the physical downlink control channel transmission.
  • the network device may also send short messages (Short Messages) through the PDCCH, where the short messages may be an indication of a system message change and/or an ETWS/CMAS indication.
  • Short Messages Short Messages
  • ETWS/CMAS can also be a public warning system (PWS, Public Warning System).
  • PWS Public Warning System
  • the terminal device When in the idle state, the terminal device needs to monitor the paging channel initiated by the CN (Core Network); when in the inactive state, the terminal device needs to monitor the paging channel initiated by the core network and the radio access network. channel. If the terminal device in the inactive state receives the paging message initiated by the core network, the terminal device automatically falls back to the idle state and notifies the non-access stratum.
  • the CN Core Network
  • the terminal device When in the idle state, the terminal device needs to monitor the paging channel initiated by the core network and the radio access network. channel. If the terminal device in the inactive state receives the paging message initiated by the core network, the terminal device automatically falls back to the idle state and notifies the non-access stratum.
  • the terminal device receives the paging message in the discontinuous reception mode to save power consumption.
  • the location where the paging message appears on the air interface is fixed, and the terminal device only needs to monitor the paging channel during a PO (Paging Occasion, paging occasion) in each discontinuous reception period.
  • the discontinuous reception period is configured by the network:
  • the terminal equipment-specific cycle (UE-specific cycle) can be configured through NAS (Non-access stratum, non-access stratum) signaling;
  • the discontinuous reception period includes multiple radio frames, and a PF (Paging Frame, paging frame) is a radio frame, which can include one or more paging occasions or a paging frame
  • the starting point of the timing; the paging timing is a subframe of the paging frame, which contains the paging wireless network temporary identification, which is transmitted on the physical downlink control channel, and the terminal device will monitor the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging wireless network temporary identification. paging message.
  • a PF Paging Frame, paging frame
  • the paging timing is a subframe of the paging frame, which contains the paging wireless network temporary identification, which is transmitted on the physical downlink control channel, and the terminal device will monitor the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging wireless network temporary identification.
  • paging message In practical applications, there may be situations where the paging occasions of multiple terminal devices are the same.
  • paging enhancement based on terminal groups reduces power consumption of terminal devices to a certain extent.
  • UE_ID since the UE_ID is relatively fixed, the number of terminal devices in some terminal groups may be more or less, that is to say, Only using the UE_ID as the grouping basis of the terminal group results in the lack of flexibility and/or controllability of the grouping of the terminal group.
  • the present application provides an information processing method, device, system and storage medium, which can adjust the terminal group to which a terminal device belongs through terminal group offset information (UE grouping offset or Paging group offset), so as to enhance the terminal group
  • UE grouping offset or Paging group offset terminal group offset information
  • the information processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be applied to the schematic diagram of the communication system architecture shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the communication system includes core network equipment such as AMF (Access and Mobile Management Function)/UPF (User Plane Function, user plane function), access network equipment and terminal equipment.
  • the access network device may be a base station of a new radio system.
  • the access network device and the AMF/UPF are connected through the interface NG, and the terminal device is connected to the access network device.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 2 can be applied to different network standards, for example, can be applied to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, global mobile communication), CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access, code division multiple access) , WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), Long Term Evolution System and future 5G and other network standards.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication, global mobile communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access, code division multiple access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • TD-SCDMA Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access
  • Long Term Evolution System Long Term Evolution System
  • the above communication system may be a system in a scenario of high reliability and low latency communication in a 5G communication system.
  • Another example application scenario is that the terminal device monitors the paging indication of the physical downlink control channel, and then determines the terminal group that needs to parse the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging indication and obtains the Short Message Service (SMS, Short Message Service).
  • SMS Short Message Service
  • the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs.
  • terminal group 1 there are 3 terminal groups, which are respectively identified as terminal group 1, terminal group 2 and terminal group 3.
  • For a group terminal, to obtain the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is to perform the offset of the offset indicated by the terminal group offset information for terminal group 1.
  • the terminal group offset information indicates that the terminal group identifier is compared to the terminal group The large direction is offset by 2 terminal groups, that is, the target terminal group is terminal group 3; for another example, if the terminal group offset information indicates that the terminal group is offset by 1 terminal group, the target terminal group is terminal group 2 (shift to the right) or terminal group 3 (shift to the left), etc., this is only an example, and does not limit the application. Specifically, the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs can be adjusted according to actual needs.
  • the terminal device acquires terminal group offset information, optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs, and based on the terminal group offset information, and determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy.
  • the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is adjusted by the terminal group offset, thereby enhancing the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
  • the terminal group offset information may be determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
  • the communication behavior may include at least one of the following:
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively.
  • the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2
  • the terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined.
  • the offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time.
  • the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 2, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the terminal group offset is determined. information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 1, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, then the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability of the terminal equipment being paged or awakened within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, and referring to the above example, the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups , then it is determined that the terminal group offset information is 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, and the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups with reference to the above example group, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2048ms.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged is 1, And referring to the above example to adjust the terminal devices in the terminal group 2 to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
  • any value in the preset duration, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration, the number of terminal groups, and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset duration is The actual size can be set according to actual needs or historical experience, which is not limited in this application.
  • the terminal device needs to determine a target terminal group corresponding to the terminal device, and in subsequent applications, the terminal device performs monitoring based on the target terminal group.
  • the following takes the terminal group offset information as a numerical value, namely the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
  • terminal device A1 terminal device A1
  • terminal device B1 terminal device C1
  • terminal device D1 terminal device D1
  • grouping method of the terminal group is mod 4
  • PG_OFFSET is all 0, and there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period and only one paging occasion in one paging frame.
  • the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1, that is, the four terminal devices are all at the same paging occasion "0":
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device A1 is 768, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "0", and it is classified in the 1st terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device D1 is 2, after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", and it is classified into the 3rd terminal group.
  • N G 4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
  • paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
  • terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
  • terminal devices at paging occasion "1" are: terminal device E (UE_ID: 111), terminal device F (UE_ID: 401), terminal device G (UE_ID: 607), and terminal device H (UE_ID: 607).
  • terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group
  • terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group
  • terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group.
  • the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D.
  • the probability can be the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal equipment currently belongs. terminal group.
  • paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
  • the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group
  • the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group
  • the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group.
  • the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2.
  • the probability can be used to adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2.
  • the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
  • the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment, which may be specifically: according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping to determine the target terminal group.
  • the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity.
  • the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling.
  • the radio resource control signaling may include: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume), and the like.
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
  • the information processing method may further include: the terminal device receiving the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling).
  • the network device here can be AMF.
  • the terminal device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity, so as to further improve the flexibility and/or controllability of terminal group grouping.
  • the terminal device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific implementation of determining the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity can refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary mobile user identity is updated as It is enough to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • the network device detects in real time or periodically detects the preset parameters of the terminal device, and determines whether the preset parameters meet the preset conditions.
  • the preset conditions are that the value of the preset parameter is greater than the preset value, that is, a certain fixed value. , if the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it is considered that the preset parameter meets the preset condition; if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, it is considered that the preset parameter does not meet the preset condition.
  • the above-mentioned fixed value may be a preset threshold value, or the fixed value may be dynamically determined or generated.
  • the selection of preset parameters may be determined according to actual conditions or historical experience. Accordingly, the preset conditions may be set according to the characteristics of the preset parameters.
  • the preset parameter may be at least one.
  • different preset parameters may correspond to different preset conditions, that is, preset parameters and preset conditions are in one-to-one correspondence; and/or, the preset conditions are preset conditions corresponding to multiple preset parameters, that is There is a many-to-one relationship between preset parameters and preset conditions.
  • the network device executes S402; and/or, if not, the process ends.
  • S402. Determine terminal group offset information of the terminal device according to preset parameters.
  • different value ranges/values may correspond to different terminal group offset information, so that the corresponding terminal group offset can be determined according to the current value of the preset parameter. information.
  • a certain value may correspond to the same terminal group offset information.
  • the corresponding relationship between the preset parameters and the terminal group offset information can be set according to actual requirements or historical experience.
  • the network device determines whether the preset parameter of the terminal device meets the preset condition, and when the preset parameter of the terminal device meets the preset condition, determines the terminal of the terminal device according to the preset parameter
  • the group offset information is used to adjust the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs through the terminal group offset, thereby enhancing the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
  • the preset parameters are parameters related to the communication behavior of the terminal device.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively.
  • the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2
  • the terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined.
  • the offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time.
  • the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 2, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the terminal group offset is determined. information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 1, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, then the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2048ms.
  • the network device needs to determine a target terminal group corresponding to the terminal device, and in subsequent applications, the network device performs paging according to the target terminal group.
  • the network device determines the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy, which may include at least one of the following:
  • the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
  • the following takes the terminal group offset information as a value, that is, the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device A1 is 768, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "0", and it is classified in the 1st terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device D1 is 2, after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", and it is classified into the 3rd terminal group.
  • the terminal device D1 frequently switches between the connected state (RRC_CONNECTED) and the inactive state due to the frequent use of data transmission, the intermittent transmission of background data, or the more frequent reception of voice calls, etc.
  • the probability of calling is greatly increased. Therefore, the terminals C1 that belong to the same terminal group are often awakened by the wake-up signal (1st terminal group and 3rd terminal group) and monitor the physical downlink control channel and possibly analyze the physical downlink shared channel. This leads to power consumption. Even if the terminal device C1 does not perform radio resource control state switching, power consumption has already occurred due to being woken up.
  • the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
  • the terminal devices with low probability of being paged can also be grouped together. Still referring to the above example, the terminal device C1 can be moved to the 2nd terminal group.
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may specifically include: calculating and obtaining the initial terminal group according to the identification information of the terminal equipment;
  • the sum of the terminal group offset information is the target terminal group, for example, G UE (UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET, optionally, G UE (UE_ID) represents the initial terminal group.
  • N G 4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
  • paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
  • terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
  • terminal devices at paging occasion "1" are: terminal device E (UE_ID: 111), terminal device F (UE_ID: 401), terminal device G (UE_ID: 607), and terminal device H (UE_ID: 607).
  • terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group
  • terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group
  • terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group.
  • the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D.
  • the probability can be the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
  • the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group
  • the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group
  • the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group.
  • the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2.
  • the probability can be used to adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2.
  • the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
  • the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity.
  • the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling.
  • the radio resource control signaling may include: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume), and the like.
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
  • the information processing method may further include: the network device sending the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling).
  • the network device here can be AMF.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, further improving the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. and/or, the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific implementation of the terminal device and/or network device to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary The mobile user identity is updated to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • An embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a terminal device. As shown in Figure 5, the method of this embodiment includes the following steps:
  • S501 Receive target information, where the target information carries indication information of a terminal group.
  • the terminal device receives target information from the network device.
  • the wake-up signal can also be DCP (DCI with CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI, downlink control signaling and CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI), wherein CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a cyclic redundancy check.
  • DCP DCI with CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI, downlink control signaling and CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI
  • CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
  • the target terminal group is determined based on the terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs. Referring to the foregoing embodiments, details are not repeated here.
  • the terminal device After receiving the target information, the terminal device needs to confirm whether the terminal group to which it currently belongs is the target terminal group. If yes, execute S503, perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group; and/or, if not, end the process.
  • the target information carries the indication information of the terminal group, confirms whether the terminal group is the target terminal group, and determines whether the terminal group is the target terminal group based on The target terminal group performs corresponding processing to save power consumption.
  • the corresponding processing based on the target terminal group may include at least one of the following:
  • the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
  • N G 4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
  • the terminal device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific implementation of determining the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity can refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary mobile user identity is updated as It is enough to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • the selection of preset parameters may be determined according to actual conditions or historical experience. Accordingly, the preset conditions may be set according to the characteristics of the preset parameters.
  • the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
  • execute S602 send target information, where the target information carries indication information of the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; and/or, if not, end the process.
  • the target information includes at least one of the following: a wake-up signal and a paging indication, for example, a paging advance indication.
  • the wake-up signal may also be a DCP signal.
  • the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs.
  • corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group, including at least one of the following:
  • the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
  • the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
  • the information processing method further includes: the network device sending the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling).
  • the network device here can be AMF.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, further improving the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
  • the terminal device and/or the network device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. and/or, the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the specific implementation of the terminal device and/or network device to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary The mobile user identity is updated to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling.
  • the radio resource control signaling may include at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), or radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume).
  • RRCReconfiguration radio resource control reconfiguration signaling
  • RRCRelease radio resource control release signaling
  • RRCResume radio resource control recovery signaling
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
  • the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period is the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively.
  • the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2
  • the terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  • the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 1024ms is greater than 1/2, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 0; If the probability of paging or waking up is less than 1/4, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on, and so on.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined.
  • the offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability of the terminal equipment being paged or awakened within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, and referring to the above example, the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups , then it is determined that the terminal group offset information is 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, and the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups with reference to the above example group, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups.
  • the preset duration can be set to 2048ms.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged is 1, And referring to the above example to adjust the terminal devices in the terminal group 2 to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
  • any value in the preset duration, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration, the number of terminal groups, and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset duration is The actual size can be set according to actual needs or historical experience, which is not limited in this application.
  • the following takes the terminal group offset information as a value, that is, the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
  • terminal device A1 terminal device A1
  • terminal device B1 terminal device C1
  • terminal device D1 terminal device D1
  • grouping method of the terminal group is mod 4
  • PG_OFFSET is all 0, and there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period and only one paging occasion in one paging frame.
  • the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1, that is, the four terminal devices are all at the same paging occasion "0":
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
  • the UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
  • the terminal device D1 frequently switches between the connected state (RRC_CONNECTED) and the inactive state due to the frequent use of data transmission, the intermittent transmission of background data, or the more frequent reception of voice calls, etc.
  • the probability of calling is greatly increased. Therefore, the terminals C1 that belong to the same terminal group are often awakened by the wake-up signal (1st terminal group and 3rd terminal group) and monitor the physical downlink control channel and possibly analyze the physical downlink shared channel. This leads to power consumption. Even if the terminal device C1 does not perform radio resource control state switching, power consumption has already occurred due to being woken up.
  • the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
  • the terminal devices with low probability of being paged can also be grouped together. Still referring to the above example, the terminal device C1 can be moved to the 2nd terminal group.
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may specifically include: calculating and obtaining the initial terminal group according to the identification information of the terminal equipment;
  • the sum of the terminal group offset information is the target terminal group, for example, G UE (UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET, optionally, G UE (UE_ID) represents the initial terminal group.
  • N G 4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
  • paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
  • terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
  • terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group
  • terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group
  • terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group.
  • the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D.
  • the probability can be the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
  • determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal equipment currently belongs. terminal group.
  • paging occasion index calculation formula i_s floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
  • the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group
  • the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group
  • the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group.
  • the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2.
  • the probability can be used to adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2.
  • the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
  • the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity.
  • the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
  • the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
  • the operations and steps implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by a component (for example, a chip or a circuit) usable in the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the operations and steps implemented by the network device may also be implemented by a component (for example, a chip or a circuit) used for the network device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the information processing apparatus 70 in this embodiment includes: an acquisition module 71 and a processing module 72 . in:
  • the processing module 72 is configured to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy based on the terminal group offset information.
  • the information processing apparatus of this embodiment can implement the solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 through the acquisition module and the processing module, and the implementation principle and technical effect thereof are similar, and are not repeated here.
  • the information processing apparatus 70 may be a terminal device, may also be a component of the terminal device (for example, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.), or may be other communication modules for implementing any of the above embodiments. Corresponds to the operation of the terminal device.
  • the terminal group offset information is determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
  • the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
  • the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period is the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  • processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
  • the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
  • the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
  • the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
  • the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application.
  • the information processing apparatus 80 in this embodiment includes: a receiving module 81 , a confirming module 82 and a processing module 83 . in:
  • a receiving module 81 configured to receive target information, where the target information carries indication information of the terminal group;
  • a confirmation module 82 configured to confirm whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs ; if yes, trigger the processing module 83 to perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group.
  • the information processing apparatus in this embodiment can implement the solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 through the receiving module, the confirmation module and the processing module, and the implementation principle and technical effect are similar, and are not repeated here.
  • the information processing apparatus 80 may be a terminal device, or may be a component of the terminal device (eg, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.), or may be other communication modules, which are used to implement any of the foregoing embodiments. Corresponds to the operation of the terminal device.
  • the target information includes at least one of the following:
  • the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
  • Non-access stratum signaling includes
  • the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
  • processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
  • the non-access stratum signaling includes configuration update command or registration accept signaling.
  • the sending module may also be used to: send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 20 in this embodiment may be a terminal device (or a component usable for a terminal device) or a network device (or a component usable for a network device) mentioned in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 20 may be configured to implement the method described in the foregoing method embodiments and corresponding to the terminal device or the network device. For details, refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 20 may include one or more processors 21, and the processors 21 may also be referred to as processing units, which may implement certain control or processing functions.
  • the processor 21 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor or the like. For example, it may be a baseband processor, or a central processing unit.
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data
  • the central processing unit can be used to control the communication equipment, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs.
  • the communication device 20 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the function of sending or receiving or communicating in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the communication device 20 may include one or more memories 22 on which instructions 24 may be stored, and the instructions may be executed on the processor 21, so that the communication device 20 executes the methods described in the above method embodiments.
  • the processor 21 may determine whether the preset parameters of the terminal device meet the preset conditions, and determine whether the preset parameters meet the preset conditions. When the preset conditions are met, the terminal group offset information of the terminal device is determined according to the preset parameters.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, the device includes: a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored on the memory and executable on the processor, the computer program being implemented when executed by the processor The steps of the method as described above.
  • each functional module in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated in one processing unit, or each module may exist physically alone, or two or more modules may be integrated in one unit.
  • the units formed by the above modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, or can be implemented in the form of hardware plus software functional units.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules implemented in the form of software functional modules may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the above-mentioned software function modules are stored in a storage medium, and include several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (English: processor) to execute the various embodiments of the present application. part of the method.
  • A, B, C means “any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", for example, " A, B or C” or "A, B and/or C” means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Exceptions to this definition arise only when combinations of elements, functions, steps, or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
  • the words “if”, “if” as used herein may be interpreted as “at” or “when” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting”.
  • the phrases “if determined” or “if detected (the stated condition or event)” can be interpreted as “when determined” or “in response to determining” or “when detected (the stated condition or event),” depending on the context )” or “in response to detection (a stated condition or event)”.
  • Terminal devices can be implemented in various forms.
  • the terminal equipment described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, as well as stationary terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • PDA Personal Digital Assistant
  • PMP portable media players
  • Navigation devices Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers
  • stationary terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
  • a mobile terminal will be used as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements particularly used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to stationary type terminals.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application.
  • the mobile terminal 90 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 91 , a WiFi module 92 , an audio output unit 93 , A /V (audio/video) input unit 94, sensor 95, display unit 96, user input unit 97, interface unit 98, memory 99, processor 100, and power supply 101 and other components.
  • RF Radio Frequency, radio frequency
  • WiFi module 92 Wireless Fidelity unit
  • a /V (audio/video) input unit 94 sensor 95
  • display unit 96 user input unit 97
  • interface unit 98 memory 99
  • processor 100 processor 100
  • power supply 101 power supply 101
  • the above-mentioned wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplexing long term evolution) and TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time division duplexing long term evolution) and so on.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communication
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • CDMA2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • Code Division Multiple Access 2000 Code Division Multiple Access 2000
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • TD-SCDMA Time Division-S
  • WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology
  • the mobile terminal can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 92, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access.
  • FIG. 12 shows the WiFi module 92, it can be understood that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted as required within the scope of not changing the essence of the invention.
  • the A/V input unit 94 is used to receive audio or video signals.
  • the A/V input unit 94 may include a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit, graphics processor) 941 and a microphone 942, and the graphics processor 941 is used for still pictures or images obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode.
  • the image data of the video is processed.
  • the processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 96 .
  • the image frames processed by the graphics processor 941 may be stored in the memory 99 (or other storage medium) or transmitted via the radio frequency unit 91 or the WiFi module 92 .
  • the microphone 942 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 942 in a telephone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, etc., and can process such sound as audio data.
  • the processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format that can be transmitted to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 91 for output in the case of a telephone conversation mode.
  • the microphone 942 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to remove (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
  • the mobile terminal 90 also includes at least one type of sensor 95, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors.
  • the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor.
  • the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 961 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display when the mobile terminal 90 is moved to the ear. Panel 961 and/or backlight.
  • the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary.
  • the display unit 96 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user.
  • the display unit 96 may include a display panel 961, and the display panel 961 may be configured in the form of an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display, liquid crystal display), an OLED (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, organic light-emitting diode), and the like.
  • LCD Liquid Crystal Display, liquid crystal display
  • OLED Organic Light-Emitting Diode, organic light-emitting diode
  • the user input unit 97 may be used to receive input numerical or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal.
  • the user input unit 97 may include a touch panel 971 and other input devices 972 .
  • the touch panel 971 also known as a touch screen, can collect touch operations by the user on or near it (such as the user's finger, stylus, etc., any suitable object or accessory on or near the touch panel 971). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program.
  • the touch panel 971 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller.
  • the touch detection device detects the touch orientation of the user, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device and converts it into contact coordinates , and then send it to the processor 100, and can receive the command sent by the processor 100 and execute it.
  • the touch panel 971 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves.
  • the user input unit 97 may also include other input devices 972 .
  • other input devices 972 may include but are not limited to one or more of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, operation sticks, etc., which are not specifically described here. limited.
  • the touch panel 971 may cover the display panel 961.
  • the touch panel 971 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits it to the processor 100 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 100 determines the type of the touch event according to the touch event.
  • the type provides corresponding visual output on the display panel 961.
  • the touch panel 971 and the display panel 961 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 971 and the display panel 961 may be integrated The input and output functions of the mobile terminal are implemented, which is not specifically limited here.
  • the interface unit 98 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 90 .
  • external devices may include wired or wireless headset ports, external power (or battery charger) ports, wired or wireless data ports, memory card ports, ports for connecting devices with identification modules, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more.
  • the interface unit 98 may be used to receive input from external devices (eg, data information, power, etc.) and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 90 or may be used to communicate between the mobile terminal 90 and the external Transfer data between devices.
  • the memory 99 may be used to store software programs as well as various data.
  • the memory 99 may mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area.
  • the storage program area may store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like;
  • the storage data area may Stores data (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) created according to the use of the mobile phone, and the like.
  • memory 99 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
  • the processor 100 is the control center of the mobile terminal, uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, runs or executes the software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 99, and calls the data stored in the memory 99. , perform various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole.
  • the processor 100 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 100 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor.
  • the demodulation processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modulation and demodulation processor may not be integrated into the processor 100.
  • the mobile terminal 90 may also include a power supply 101 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • a power supply 101 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components.
  • the power supply 101 may be logically connected to the processor 100 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system and other functions.
  • the mobile terminal 90 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described herein again.
  • the UE11 may be the above-mentioned mobile terminal 90, which will not be repeated here.
  • EPC 13 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, mobility management entity) 131, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, home subscriber server) 132, other MME 133, SGW (Serving Gate Way, serving gateway) 134, PGW (PDN Gate Way, Packet data network gateway) 135 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, policy and charging functional entity) 136 and so on.
  • MME 131 is a control node that handles signaling between UE 11 and EPC 13, providing bearer and connection management.
  • the HSS 132 is used to provide registers to manage functions such as a home location register (not shown), and to store user-specific information about service characteristics, data rates, and the like.
  • PCRF 136 is the policy and charging control policy decision point for service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and accounting
  • a charge enforcement functional unit selects and provides available policy and charge control decisions.
  • the IP service 14 may include the Internet, an intranet, an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services and the like.
  • IMS IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application provides an information processing method, apparatus and system, and a storage medium. The method comprises: a terminal device acquiring terminal group offset information, wherein the terminal group offset information is used to adjust a terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; and determining, on the basis of the terminal group offset information and according to a preset policy, a target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs, so as to enhance the elasticity and/or controllability of the terminal grouping.

Description

信息处理方法、设备、系统及存储介质Information processing method, device, system and storage medium 技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种信息处理方法、设备、系统及存储介质。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to an information processing method, device, system, and storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
由于终端设备数量越来越庞大，因此在通信中，有时会存在多个处于非连接态(如空闲态或非激活态)或连接态的终端设备对应同一PO(Paging Occasion，寻呼时机)的情况。该情况下，只要其中一个终端设备被寻呼，其余终端设备也会被误唤醒，从而导致其余终端设备的功耗开销。因此，为降低终端设备的功耗，引入终端群组(UE grouping)的概念，通过将处于同一寻呼时机的终端设备划分为不同的终端群组，以终端群组的方式进行寻呼，来减少被误唤醒的终端设备的个数。但仅采用UE_ID作为终端群组的分组依据，会存在缺乏弹性和/或可控性的问题。Due to the increasing number of terminal devices, in communication, sometimes there are multiple terminal devices in the disconnected state (such as idle state or inactive state) or connected state corresponding to the same PO (Paging Occasion, paging occasion). Happening. In this case, as long as one of the terminal devices is paged, the other terminal devices will also be woken up by mistake, resulting in power consumption overhead of the remaining terminal devices. Therefore, in order to reduce the power consumption of terminal equipment, the concept of terminal grouping (UE grouping) is introduced. Reduce the number of terminal devices that are awakened by mistake. However, only using the UE_ID as the grouping basis of the terminal group may have problems of lack of flexibility and/or controllability.
前面的叙述在于提供一般的背景信息，并不一定构成现有技术。The preceding statements are intended to provide general background information and do not necessarily constitute prior art.
发明内容SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法、设备、系统及存储介质，以增强终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。Embodiments of the present application provide an information processing method, device, system, and storage medium, so as to enhance the flexibility and/or controllability of terminal group grouping.
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于终端设备，包括：获取终端群组偏移信息，可选地，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。In a first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a terminal device, including: acquiring terminal group offset information, optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs ; Based on the terminal group offset information, determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据与终端设备有关的通信行为确定的。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is determined according to a preset policy, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes configuration update command or registration accept signaling.
可选地，目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理方法还可以包括：接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing method may further include: receiving a reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于终端设备，包括：接收目标信息，目标信息携带有终端群组的指示信息；确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；若是，则基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。In a second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a terminal device, including: receiving target information, where the target information carries indication information of a terminal group; confirming whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally Preferably, the target terminal group is determined based on the terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; if so, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following:
唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
寻呼指示。paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括以下至少一种：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling, or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，基于目标终端群组进行相应处理，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group, including at least one of the following:
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，监听物理下行控制信道；Monitor the physical downlink control channel according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，接收短消息；Receive short messages according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据寻呼指示所指示的终端群组信息，解析物理下行共享信道。The physical downlink shared channel is parsed according to the terminal group information indicated by the paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，目标终端群组信息基于终端群组偏移信息确定，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理方法还可以包括：接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing method may further include: receiving a reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于网络设备，包括以下步骤：判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；若是，根据预设参数确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组。In a third aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a network device and includes the following steps: judging whether preset parameters of a terminal device meet preset conditions; if so, determining a terminal group of the terminal device according to the preset parameters Offset information, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
可选地，预设条件可以为至少一预设参数的值大于预设值，即某一固定值(可以为预设阈值，或者，动态确定或生成的值)，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，可认为预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，可认为预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the value of at least one preset parameter is greater than the preset value, that is, a certain fixed value (which may be a preset threshold value, or a dynamically determined or generated value), if the value of the preset parameter is greater than For the fixed value, it may be considered that the preset parameter meets the preset condition; and/or, if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, it may be considered that the preset parameter does not meet the preset condition.
可选地，预设参数是与终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数。Optionally, the preset parameter is a parameter related to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，信息处理方法还包括：在确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息之后，发送终端群组偏移信息。Optionally, the information processing method further includes: after determining the terminal group offset information of the terminal device, sending the terminal group offset information.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理方法还可以包括：发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing method may further include: sending the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于网络设备，包括以下步骤：判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；若是，发送目标信息，目标信息携带有所述终端设备所属的终端群组的指示信息；确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；若是，则基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a network device and includes the following steps: judging whether a preset parameter of a terminal device meets a preset condition; if so, sending target information, where the target information carries the terminal Indication information of the terminal group to which the device belongs; confirms whether the terminal group is the target terminal group, optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on the terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the belonging of the terminal device the terminal group; if so, perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group.
可选地，所述预设参数是与所述终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数。Optionally, the preset parameter is a parameter related to the communication behavior of the terminal device.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
可选地，预设条件可以为至少一预设参数的值大于某一固定值(可以为预设阈值，或者，动态确定或生成的值)，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，可认为预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，可认为预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the value of at least one preset parameter is greater than a certain fixed value (it may be a preset threshold value, or a dynamically determined or generated value). If the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it may be It is considered that the preset parameter complies with the preset condition; and/or, if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, the preset parameter may be deemed to not meet the preset condition.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following:
唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
寻呼指示。paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，基于目标终端群组进行相应处理，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group, including at least one of the following:
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送包含寻呼无线网络临时标识的信息；Based on the target terminal group, send information including the temporary identity of the paging wireless network through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送短信息；Based on the target terminal group, send short messages through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理共享控制信道发送寻呼消息。Based on the target terminal group, the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，目标终端群组信息基于终端群组偏移信息确定，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理方法还包括：发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing method further includes: sending a reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理装置，应用于终端设备，包括：In a fifth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing apparatus, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
获取模块，用于获取终端群组偏移信息，可选地，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；an acquisition module, configured to acquire terminal group offset information, optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
处理模块，用于基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。The processing module is configured to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy based on the terminal group offset information.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据与终端设备有关的通信行为确定的。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，处理模块具体用于以下至少一种：Optionally, the processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源 控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理装置还可以包括：接收模块，用于接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing apparatus may further include: a receiving module configured to receive the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理装置，应用于终端设备，包括：In a sixth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing apparatus, which is applied to a terminal device, including:
接收模块，用于接收目标信息，目标信息携带有终端群组的指示信息；a receiving module, configured to receive target information, where the target information carries the indication information of the terminal group;
确认模块，用于确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；若是，则触发处理模块基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。A confirmation module, configured to confirm whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; If so, the trigger processing module performs corresponding processing based on the target terminal group.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following:
唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
寻呼指示。paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes configuration update command or registration accept signaling.
可选地，处理模块具体用于以下至少一种：Optionally, the processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，监听物理下行控制信道；Monitor the physical downlink control channel according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，接收短消息；Receive short messages according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据寻呼指示所指示的终端群组信息，解析物理下行共享信道。The physical downlink shared channel is parsed according to the terminal group information indicated by the paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，目标终端群组信息基于终端群组偏移信息确定，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，接收模块还可以用于：接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the receiving module may also be used to: receive the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理装置，应用于网络设备，包括：In a seventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing apparatus, which is applied to network equipment, including:
判断模块，用于判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；若是，触发处理模块根据预设参数确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组。The judgment module is used to judge whether the preset parameters of the terminal equipment meet the preset conditions; if so, the trigger processing module determines the terminal group offset information of the terminal equipment according to the preset parameters, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the belonging of the terminal equipment. terminal group.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
可选地，预设条件可以为至少一预设参数的值大于某一固定值(可以为预设阈值，或者，动态确定或生成的值)，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，可认为预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，可认为预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the value of at least one preset parameter is greater than a certain fixed value (it may be a preset threshold value, or a dynamically determined or generated value). If the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it may be It is considered that the preset parameter complies with the preset condition; and/or, if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, the preset parameter may be deemed to not meet the preset condition.
可选地，预设参数是与终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数。Optionally, the preset parameter is a parameter related to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，信息处理装置还包括：第一发送模块，用于在确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息之后，发送终端群组偏移信息。Optionally, the information processing apparatus further includes: a first sending module configured to send the terminal group offset information after determining the terminal group offset information of the terminal device.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理装置还可以包括：第二发送模块，用于发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing apparatus may further include: a second sending module configured to send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种信息处理装置，应用于网络设备，包括：判断模块，用于判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；若是，触发发送模块发送目标信息，目标信息携带有所述终端设备所属的终端群组的指示信息；以及，触发处理模块执行以下操作：In an eighth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an information processing apparatus, which is applied to network equipment, and includes: a judgment module for judging whether preset parameters of the terminal equipment meet preset conditions; if so, triggering the sending module to send target information, the target The information carries indication information of the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; and the processing module is triggered to perform the following operations:
确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；Confirming whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
若是，则基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。If so, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group.
可选地，所述预设参数是与所述终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数；Optionally, the preset parameter is a relevant parameter of the communication behavior related to the terminal device;
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
可选地，预设条件可以为至少一预设参数的值大于某一固定值(可以为预设阈值，或者，动态确定或生成的值)，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，可认为预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，可认为预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the value of at least one preset parameter is greater than a certain fixed value (it may be a preset threshold value, or a dynamically determined or generated value). If the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it may be It is considered that the preset parameter complies with the preset condition; and/or, if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, the preset parameter may be deemed to not meet the preset condition.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following:
唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
寻呼指示。paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，处理模块可以具体用于以下至少一种：Optionally, the processing module can be specifically used for at least one of the following:
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送包含寻呼无线网络临时标识的信息；Based on the target terminal group, send information including the temporary identity of the paging wireless network through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送短信息；Based on the target terminal group, send short messages through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理共享控制信道发送寻呼消息。Based on the target terminal group, the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，目标终端群组信息是基于终端群组偏移信息确定的，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，发送模块还可以用于：发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the sending module may also be used to: send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
第九方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信设备，包括：存储器和处理器；In a ninth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, including: a memory and a processor;
存储器用于存储程序指令；memory is used to store program instructions;
处理器用于调用存储器中的程序指令以执行如上任一项所述的方法。The processor is configured to invoke program instructions in the memory to perform the method as described in any of the above.
需说明的是，第九方面的通信设备可以是终端设备或网络设备，也可以是终端设备的芯片或网络 设备的芯片。It should be noted that the communication device of the ninth aspect may be a terminal device or a network device, or may be a chip of a terminal device or a chip of a network device.
第十方面，本申请实施例提供一种通信系统，包括：In a tenth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including:
用于实现如第一方面或第二方面中任一方法的终端设备；A terminal device for implementing the method according to any one of the first aspect or the second aspect;
用于实现如第三方面或第四方面中任一方法的网络设备。A network device for implementing the method according to any of the third or fourth aspects.
第十一方面，本申请实施例提供一种可读存储介质，可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序被执行时，实现如上所述的任一方法。In an eleventh aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed, any of the foregoing methods is implemented.
第十二方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，计算机程序产品包括计算机程序，计算机程序存储在可读存储介质中，处理器可以从可读存储介质中读取计算机程序，处理器执行计算机程序实现如上所述的任一方法。In a twelfth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program, the computer program is stored in a readable storage medium, the processor can read the computer program from the readable storage medium, and the processor executes the A computer program implements any of the methods described above.
本申请提供一种信息处理方法、设备、系统及存储介质，终端设备获取终端群组偏移信息，可选地，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组，并基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。通过终端群组偏移量调整终端设备所属的目标终端群组，可以增强终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。The present application provides an information processing method, device, system, and storage medium. A terminal device obtains terminal group offset information. Optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs, and based on the terminal group offset information For group offset information, the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is determined according to a preset policy. Adjusting the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs by adjusting the terminal group offset can enhance the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
附图说明Description of drawings
此处的附图被并入说明书中并构成本说明书的一部分，示出了符合本申请的实施例，并与说明书一起用于解释本申请的原理。为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，对于本领域普通技术人员而言，在不付出创造性劳动性的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification, illustrate embodiments consistent with the application and together with the description serve to explain the principles of the application. In order to illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application more clearly, the accompanying drawings required for the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, for those of ordinary skill in the art, without creative efforts On the premise, other drawings can also be obtained according to these drawings.
图1为寻呼机制示意图；1 is a schematic diagram of a paging mechanism;
图2为本申请一实施例提供的通信系统的架构示意图；FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图3为本申请一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图；3 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请另一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图；4 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图5为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图；5 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图6为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图；6 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图；FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请另一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图；FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图；FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图；FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application;
图11为本申请一实施例提供的通信设备的结构示意图；FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图12为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图；12 is a schematic diagram of a hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图。FIG. 13 is an architectural diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
本申请目的的实现、功能特点及优点将结合实施例，参照附图做进一步说明。通过上述附图，已示出本申请明确的实施例，后文中将有更详细的描述。这些附图和文字描述并不是为了通过任何方式限制本申请构思的范围，而是通过参考特定实施例为本领域技术人员说明本申请的概念。The realization, functional characteristics and advantages of the purpose of the present application will be further described with reference to the accompanying drawings in conjunction with the embodiments. Specific embodiments of the present application have been shown by the above-mentioned drawings, and will be described in more detail hereinafter. These drawings and written descriptions are not intended to limit the scope of the concepts of the present application in any way, but to illustrate the concepts of the present application to those skilled in the art by referring to specific embodiments.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
为使本申请实施例的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。基于本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本申请保护的范围。In order to make the purposes, technical solutions and advantages of the embodiments of the present application clearer, the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application will be described clearly and completely below with reference to the drawings in the embodiments of the present application. Obviously, the described embodiments It is a part of the embodiments of the present application, but not all of the embodiments. Based on the embodiments in the present application, all other embodiments obtained by those of ordinary skill in the art without creative efforts shall fall within the protection scope of the present application.
首先对本申请实施例所涉及的名词进行解释：First, the terms involved in the embodiments of the present application are explained:
终端设备，可以是无线终端设备也可以是有线终端设备。无线终端设备可以是指一种具有无线收发功能的设备，可以部署在陆地上，包括室内或室外、手持或车载；也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等)；还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端设备可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、带无线收发功能的电脑、VR(Virtual Reality，虚拟现实)终端设备、AR(Augmented Reality，增强现实)终端设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端设备、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端设备、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线终端设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端设备、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端设备、可穿戴设备等等，在此不作限定。可以理解的是，本申请实施例中，终端设备也可以称为UE(User Equipment，用户设备)、移动终端(Mobile Terminal)、系统、订户单元(Subscriber Unit)、订户站(Subscriber Station)，移动站(Mobile Station)、移动台(Mobile)、远程站(Remote Station)、远程终端(Remote Terminal)、接入终端(Access Terminal)、 用户终端(User Terminal)或用户代理(User Agent)，在此不作限定。The terminal device may be a wireless terminal device or a wired terminal device. Wireless terminal equipment can refer to a device with wireless transceiver function, which can be deployed on land, including indoor or outdoor, hand-held or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as ships, etc.); it can also be deployed in the air (such as aircraft) , balloons and satellites, etc.). The terminal device can be a mobile phone (mobile phone), a tablet computer (Pad), a computer with wireless transceiver function, VR (Virtual Reality, virtual reality) terminal device, AR (Augmented Reality, augmented reality) terminal device, industrial control (industrial control) Wireless terminal equipment in ), wireless terminal equipment in self-driving, wireless terminal equipment in remote medical, wireless terminal equipment in smart grid, transportation safety (transportation safety) Wireless terminal equipment in a smart city (smart city), wireless terminal equipment in a smart home (smart home), wearable equipment, etc., which are not limited here. It can be understood that, in this embodiment of the present application, the terminal device may also be referred to as UE (User Equipment, user equipment), mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), system, subscriber unit (Subscriber Unit), subscriber station (Subscriber Station), mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), system, subscriber unit (Subscriber Unit), subscriber station (Subscriber Station), mobile Mobile Station, Mobile Station, Remote Station, Remote Terminal, Access Terminal, User Terminal, or User Agent, where Not limited.
网络设备，又称为RAN(radio access network，无线接入网)设备，是一种将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备，可以是LTE(Long Term Evolution，长期演进)系统中的演进型基站(evolutional node B，eNB或eNodeB)，或者中继站或接入点，或者5G(5th Generation mobile networks或5th Generation wireless systems、5th-Generation，第五代移动通信技术)网络中的基站，如发送和接收点(transmission and reception point，TRP)、控制器等，在此并不限定。A network device, also known as a RAN (radio access network, radio access network) device, is a device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network, which can be an evolved base station in an LTE (Long Term Evolution, Long Term Evolution) system (evolutional node B, eNB or eNodeB), or relay station or access point, or base station in 5G (5th Generation mobile networks or 5th Generation wireless systems, 5th-Generation, fifth-generation mobile communication technology) network, such as transmission and reception Point (transmission and reception point, TRP), controller, etc., are not limited here.
非激活态(RRC_INACTIVE)，是在5G NR(New Radio，新无线电)系统中，为了满足新的业务特性，并考虑UE(User Equipment，终端设备)的功耗，相对比4G LTE系统，定义的一种新的RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)状态。终端设备在接入网络完成本次数据传输后，网络设备并不会直接让终端设备释放无线资源控制连接进入空闲态(或称为“闲置态”，RRC_IDLE)，而是由网络设备配置终端设备进入非激活态。终端设备进入非激活态后，不与网络设备进行数据传输，但可以周期性地接收来自网络设备的寻呼。网络设备保留该终端设备所建立的无线资源控制连接的配置、承载的配置、安全配置以及n2接口(5G核心网与基站之间的接口)与该终端设备相关的参数配置，终端设备也需要保存无线资源控制连接的配置、承载的配置和安全配置等。由于终端设备和网络设备均有该终端设备的无线资源控制连接配置参数，因此进入非激活态的终端设备在有数据传输时，可以利用保存的无线资源控制连接配置参数快速接入网络设备进行数据传输。一些实现中，网络设备通过RRC release(RRC释放)信令指示终端设备进入非激活态。Inactive state (RRC_INACTIVE), in the 5G NR (New Radio, new radio) system, in order to meet the new business characteristics, and consider the power consumption of UE (User Equipment, terminal equipment), compared with 4G LTE system, defined A new RRC (Radio Resource Control, Radio Resource Control) state. After the terminal device accesses the network and completes this data transmission, the network device does not directly let the terminal device release the radio resource control connection and enter the idle state (or "idle state", RRC_IDLE), but configures the terminal device by the network device. into an inactive state. After the terminal device enters the inactive state, it does not perform data transmission with the network device, but can periodically receive paging from the network device. The network device retains the configuration of the radio resource control connection established by the terminal device, the configuration of the bearer, the security configuration, and the parameter configuration of the n2 interface (the interface between the 5G core network and the base station) related to the terminal device. The terminal device also needs to save RRC connection configuration, bearer configuration and security configuration, etc. Since both the terminal device and the network device have the RRC connection configuration parameters of the terminal device, the terminal device in the inactive state can use the saved RRC connection configuration parameters to quickly access the network device for data transmission when there is data transmission. transmission. In some implementations, the network device instructs the terminal device to enter the inactive state through RRC release (RRC release) signaling.
寻呼(Paging)，当网络侧有数据需要发送给终端设备，或者，当有系统信息变化和ETWS(Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System，地震与海啸警示系统)/CMAS(Commercial Mobile Alert Service，商业移动警示服务)指示时，允许网络设备寻呼处于空闲态或非激活态或连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)的终端设备。可选地，寻呼指示(Paging indicator)在PDCCH(Physical Downlink Control Channel，物理下行控制信道)上用P-RNTI(Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier，寻呼无线网络临时标识)加扰，并通过物理下行控制信道发送。终端设备在所属的寻呼时机监听物理下行控制信道并检测(detect)是否有寻呼无线网络临时标识加扰的DCI(Downlink Control Information，下行控制信息)以确认是否有寻呼指示；如果有寻呼指示，则解析(decode)PDSCH(Physical Downlink Share Channel，物理下行共享信道)上所发送的寻呼消息(Paging message)。Paging, when there is data on the network side that needs to be sent to the terminal device, or when there are system information changes and ETWS (Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System, Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System)/CMAS (Commercial Mobile Alert Service, commercial mobile alerts) service) indication, the network device is allowed to page the terminal device in idle state or inactive state or connected state (RRC_CONNECTED). Optionally, the paging indicator (Paging indicator) is scrambled with P-RNTI (Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier, Paging Radio Network Temporary Identifier) on the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel, Physical Downlink Control Channel), and through the physical downlink control channel transmission. The terminal device monitors the physical downlink control channel at the paging occasion and detects whether there is a DCI (Downlink Control Information, downlink control information) scrambled by the paging wireless network temporary identifier to confirm whether there is a paging indication; The paging message (Paging message) sent on the PDSCH (Physical Downlink Share Channel, physical downlink shared channel) is parsed (decode).
可选地，网络设备还可以通过PDCCH发送短消息(Short Messages)，所述短消息可以是指示系统消息改变和/或ETWS/CMAS指示。Optionally, the network device may also send short messages (Short Messages) through the PDCCH, where the short messages may be an indication of a system message change and/or an ETWS/CMAS indication.
可选地，ETWS/CMAS还可以为一种公共警示系统(PWS，Public Warning System)。Optionally, ETWS/CMAS can also be a public warning system (PWS, Public Warning System).
当处于空闲态时，终端设备需监听CN(Core Network，核心网)发起寻呼的寻呼信道；在处于非激活态时，终端设备需监听核心网和无线接入网发起寻呼的寻呼信道。若处于非激活态的终端设备接收到核心网发起的寻呼消息，则终端设备自行回落到空闲态，并通知非接入层。When in the idle state, the terminal device needs to monitor the paging channel initiated by the CN (Core Network); when in the inactive state, the terminal device needs to monitor the paging channel initiated by the core network and the radio access network. channel. If the terminal device in the inactive state receives the paging message initiated by the core network, the terminal device automatically falls back to the idle state and notifies the non-access stratum.
DRX(Discontinuous Reception，非连续接收)，终端设备以非连续接收方式接收寻呼消息，以节省耗电量。寻呼消息出现在空口的位置是固定的，终端设备只需在每个非连续接收周期的一个PO(Paging Occasion，寻呼时机)期间监听寻呼信道。可选地，非连续接收周期由网络配置：DRX (Discontinuous Reception, discontinuous reception), the terminal device receives the paging message in the discontinuous reception mode to save power consumption. The location where the paging message appears on the air interface is fixed, and the terminal device only needs to monitor the paging channel during a PO (Paging Occasion, paging occasion) in each discontinuous reception period. Optionally, the discontinuous reception period is configured by the network:
1)对于核心网发起的寻呼，在系统信息中广播一个默认周期(Default Cycle)；1) For the paging initiated by the core network, broadcast a default cycle (Default Cycle) in the system information;
2)对于核心网发起的寻呼，可以通过NAS(Non-access stratum，非接入层)信令配置终端设备特定的周期(UE specific cycle)；2) For the paging initiated by the core network, the terminal equipment-specific cycle (UE-specific cycle) can be configured through NAS (Non-access stratum, non-access stratum) signaling;
3)对于无线接入网发起的寻呼，通过RRC(Radio Resource Control，无线资源控制)信令配置终端设备特定的周期(UE-specific cycle)。3) For the paging initiated by the radio access network, configure a terminal equipment-specific cycle (UE-specific cycle) through RRC (Radio Resource Control, Radio Resource Control) signaling.
终端设备使用适用的非连续接收周期中的最短周期，即处于空闲态的终端设备使用上述前两个周期中的最短周期，而处于非激活态的终端设备使用三个周期中的最短周期。The terminal equipment uses the shortest period of the applicable discontinuous reception periods, that is, the terminal equipment in the idle state uses the shortest period of the first two periods, and the terminal equipment in the inactive state uses the shortest period of the three periods.
示例地，寻呼机制示意图如图1所示，非连续接收周期包含多个无线帧，一个PF(Paging Frame，寻呼帧)是一个无线帧，可以包含一个或多个寻呼时机或一个寻呼时机的起点；寻呼时机是寻呼帧的一个子帧，其中包含寻呼无线网络临时标识，在物理下行控制信道上传输，终端设备将根据寻呼无线网络临时标识从物理下行共享信道上监听寻呼消息。在实际应用中，可能存在多个终端设备的寻呼时机相同的情况。For example, the schematic diagram of the paging mechanism is shown in FIG. 1 , the discontinuous reception period includes multiple radio frames, and a PF (Paging Frame, paging frame) is a radio frame, which can include one or more paging occasions or a paging frame The starting point of the timing; the paging timing is a subframe of the paging frame, which contains the paging wireless network temporary identification, which is transmitted on the physical downlink control channel, and the terminal device will monitor the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging wireless network temporary identification. paging message. In practical applications, there may be situations where the paging occasions of multiple terminal devices are the same.
终端设备的标识信息(UE_ID)，在长期演进系统中，UE_ID是根据IMSI(International Mobile Subscriber Identity，国际移动用户识别)计算获得的；在新无线电系统中，UE_ID是主要根据5G-S-TMSI(5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier，5G服务临时移动用户标识)计算获得的。UE_ID的值介于0～1023，共1024个，对应公式：UE_ID:5G-S-TMSI mod 1024，或者，IMSI mod 1024。可选地，“5G-S-TMSI”的组成可分为三个部分：AMF Set ID、AMF Pointer、5G-TMSI，其长度分别为：10比特(bits)、6比特、32比特。The identification information (UE_ID) of the terminal equipment, in the long-term evolution system, the UE_ID is calculated and obtained according to the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity, International Mobile Subscriber Identity); in the new radio system, the UE_ID is mainly based on the 5G-S-TMSI ( 5G S-Temporary Mobile Subscription Identifier, 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identifier) calculated. The value of UE_ID ranges from 0 to 1023, with a total of 1024. The corresponding formula is: UE_ID: 5G-S-TMSI mod 1024, or, IMSI mod 1024. Optionally, the composition of "5G-S-TMSI" can be divided into three parts: AMF Set ID, AMF Pointer, and 5G-TMSI, whose lengths are respectively: 10 bits (bits), 6 bits, and 32 bits.
不论是核心网发起或是无线接入网发起的寻呼，终端设备都是依据“UE_ID”确认寻呼时机：i_s＝ floor(UE_ID/N)mod Ns，可选地，N表示一个非连续接收周期中包含的寻呼帧的个数；Ns表示一个寻呼帧中包含的寻呼时机个数，可通过系统信息来配置。目前，还提出以“终端设备的标识信息”为基础来群组终端，得到终端群组。Whether the paging is initiated by the core network or the radio access network, the terminal device confirms the paging occasion according to "UE_ID": i_s= floor(UE_ID/N) mod Ns, optionally, N represents a discontinuous reception The number of paging frames included in the cycle; Ns represents the number of paging occasions included in a paging frame, which can be configured through system information. At present, it is also proposed to group terminals on the basis of "identification information of terminal equipment" to obtain a terminal group.
终端群组(UE grouping)，也可以称为寻呼分组(Paging group)。为进一步降低终端设备的能耗，目前提出以终端群组的方式进行寻呼增强(paging enhancement)，即针对需要监听相同寻呼时机的终端设备再分成多个(寻呼)子群组，网络需要指示一个子群组的终端设备是否需要监听寻呼消息。Terminal grouping (UE grouping), also known as paging group (Paging group). In order to further reduce the energy consumption of terminal equipment, it is currently proposed to perform paging enhancement in the form of terminal groups, that is, the terminal equipment that needs to monitor the same paging occasion is divided into multiple (paging) subgroups. It is necessary to indicate whether the terminal devices of a subgroup need to monitor paging messages.
目前，基于终端群组进行寻呼增强，在一定程度上降低了终端设备的功耗。但以“UE_ID”为基础来群组终端得到终端群组时，由于UE_ID是相对固定的，因此可能导致某一些终端群组内的终端设备个数较多或者较少的情况，也就是说，仅采用UE_ID作为终端群组的分组依据，导致终端群组的分组缺乏弹性和/或可控性。Currently, paging enhancement based on terminal groups reduces power consumption of terminal devices to a certain extent. However, when a group of terminals is used to obtain a terminal group based on "UE_ID", since the UE_ID is relatively fixed, the number of terminal devices in some terminal groups may be more or less, that is to say, Only using the UE_ID as the grouping basis of the terminal group results in the lack of flexibility and/or controllability of the grouping of the terminal group.
基于上述问题，本申请提供一种信息处理方法、设备、系统及存储介质，通过终端群组偏移信息(UE grouping offset或Paging group offset)调整终端设备所属的终端群组，以达到增强终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性的目的。Based on the above problems, the present application provides an information processing method, device, system and storage medium, which can adjust the terminal group to which a terminal device belongs through terminal group offset information (UE grouping offset or Paging group offset), so as to enhance the terminal group The purpose of flexibility and/or controllability of component groups.
示例地，本申请实施例提供的信息处理方法，可以适用于图2所示的通信系统架构示意图。如图2所示，该通信系统包括：AMF(Access and Mobile Management Function，接入和移动管理功能)/UPF(User Plane Function，用户平面功能)等核心网设备、接入网设备以及终端设备。示例地，接入网设备可以为新无线电系统的基站。图2所示场景中，接入网设备与AMF/UPF之间通过接口NG连接，终端设备接入接入网设备。For example, the information processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application may be applied to the schematic diagram of the communication system architecture shown in FIG. 2 . As shown in Figure 2, the communication system includes core network equipment such as AMF (Access and Mobile Management Function)/UPF (User Plane Function, user plane function), access network equipment and terminal equipment. By way of example, the access network device may be a base station of a new radio system. In the scenario shown in Figure 2, the access network device and the AMF/UPF are connected through the interface NG, and the terminal device is connected to the access network device.
需要说明的是，图2所示的通信系统可以适用于不同的网络制式，例如，可以适用于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication，全球移动通讯)、CDMA(Code Division Multiple Access，码分多址)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access，宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access，时分同步码分多址)、长期演进系统及未来的5G等网络制式。可选的，上述通信系统可以为5G通信系统中高可靠与低时延通信的场景中的系统。It should be noted that the communication system shown in FIG. 2 can be applied to different network standards, for example, can be applied to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, global mobile communication), CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access, code division multiple access) , WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), Long Term Evolution System and future 5G and other network standards. Optionally, the above communication system may be a system in a scenario of high reliability and low latency communication in a 5G communication system.
在具体实现中，本申请下述各实施例例如可以应用于如下场景：In specific implementation, the following embodiments of the present application can be applied to the following scenarios, for example:
一种示例应用场景为，终端设备接收网络设备下发的唤醒信号，所述唤醒信号指示需要监听物理下行控制信道的寻呼指示的终端群组，再根据寻呼指示解析物理下行共享信道并获取短消息服务(SMS，Short Message Service)。An example application scenario is that the terminal device receives a wake-up signal sent by the network device, the wake-up signal indicates a terminal group that needs to monitor the paging indication of the physical downlink control channel, and then parses the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging indication and obtains the Short Message Service (SMS, Short Message Service).
另一种示例应用场景为，终端设备监听物理下行控制信道的寻呼指示，再根据寻呼指示确定需要解析物理下行共享信道的终端群组并获取短消息服务(SMS，Short Message Service)。Another example application scenario is that the terminal device monitors the paging indication of the physical downlink control channel, and then determines the terminal group that needs to parse the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging indication and obtains the Short Message Service (SMS, Short Message Service).
又一种示例应用场景为，所述寻呼指示为来电(MT，Mobile Terminated)指示，终端设备发起寻呼响应并建立通话连线。Another example application scenario is that the paging indication is an incoming call (MT, Mobile Terminated) indication, and the terminal device initiates a paging response and establishes a call connection.
一种示例应用场景为，当寻呼指示为系统消息改变或ETWS/CMAS，则终端设备重新获取系统消息或获取相应的系统消息，以获取更新后的系统消息或广播的紧急/警示消息。An example application scenario is that when the paging indication is a system message change or ETWS/CMAS, the terminal device re-acquires system messages or acquires corresponding system messages to acquire updated system messages or broadcast emergency/alert messages.
下面以具体地实施例对本申请实施例的技术方案以及本申请的技术方案如何解决上述技术问题进行详细说明。下面这几个具体的实施例可以相互结合，对于相同或相似的概念或过程可能在某些实施例中不再赘述。下面将结合附图，对本申请实施例的实施例进行描述。The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application and how the technical solutions of the present application solve the above-mentioned technical problems will be described in detail below with specific examples. The following specific embodiments may be combined with each other, and the same or similar concepts or processes may not be repeated in some embodiments. Embodiments of the embodiments of the present application will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
图3为本申请一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图。本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于如上所述的终端设备。如图3所示，本实施例的方法包括以下步骤：FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by an embodiment of the present application. An embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to the above-mentioned terminal device. As shown in Figure 3, the method of this embodiment includes the following steps:
S301、获取终端群组偏移信息。S301. Acquire terminal group offset information.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs.
示例地，终端设备获取终端群组偏移信息，可以是终端设备接收来自网络设备的终端群组偏移信息，此时，需网络设备在确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息之后，发送终端群组偏移信息。或者，终端设备获取终端群组偏移信息可以是从终端设备内部获取终端群组偏移信息，本申请实施例不限制具体的获取方式。For example, when the terminal device obtains the terminal group offset information, it may be that the terminal device receives the terminal group offset information from the network device. In this case, the network device needs to send the terminal group offset information after determining the terminal group offset information of the terminal device. Group offset information. Alternatively, the terminal group offset information may be acquired by the terminal device by acquiring the terminal group offset information from inside the terminal device, and the embodiment of the present application does not limit the specific acquisition method.
S302、基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。S302. Based on the terminal group offset information, determine a target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy.
可选地，预设策略可以是得到终端群组的具体公式或者相关策略。例如，目前是以“终端设备的标识信息”为基础来群组终端，得到终端群组，在此基础上，本申请实施例增加终端群组偏移信息的考量，结合终端设备的标识信息和终端群组偏移信息来群组终端，得到终端群组。通过终端群组偏移信息的设置，可以灵活调整终端设备所属的终端群组。Optionally, the preset strategy may be a specific formula for obtaining a terminal group or a related strategy. For example, currently, terminals are grouped on the basis of "identification information of terminal equipment" to obtain terminal groups. The terminal group offset information is used to group terminals to obtain terminal groups. By setting the terminal group offset information, the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs can be flexibly adjusted.
示例地，有3个终端群组，分别标识为终端群组1、终端群组2和终端群组3。可选地，以“终端设备的标识信息”为基础来群组终端，得到终端设备a所属的终端群组为终端群组1；但若结合终端设备的标识信息和终端群组偏移信息来群组终端，得到终端设备所属的终端群组则为对终端群组1进行终端群组偏移信息所指示偏移量的偏移，例如，终端群组偏移信息指示向终端群组标识较大的方向偏移2个终端群组，即目标终端群组为终端群组3；又例如，终端群组偏移信息指示偏移 1个终端群组，则目标终端群组为终端群组2(向右偏移)或者终端群组3(向左偏移)，等等，此处仅为示例说明，不对本申请构成限制，具体可以根据实际需求进行终端设备所属终端群组的调整。For example, there are 3 terminal groups, which are respectively identified as terminal group 1, terminal group 2 and terminal group 3. Optionally, group terminals based on "identification information of terminal equipment", and obtain the terminal group to which terminal equipment a belongs as terminal group 1; For a group terminal, to obtain the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is to perform the offset of the offset indicated by the terminal group offset information for terminal group 1. For example, the terminal group offset information indicates that the terminal group identifier is compared to the terminal group The large direction is offset by 2 terminal groups, that is, the target terminal group is terminal group 3; for another example, if the terminal group offset information indicates that the terminal group is offset by 1 terminal group, the target terminal group is terminal group 2 (shift to the right) or terminal group 3 (shift to the left), etc., this is only an example, and does not limit the application. Specifically, the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs can be adjusted according to actual needs.
在本申请实施例提供的信息处理方法中，终端设备获取终端群组偏移信息，可选地，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组，并基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。通过终端群组偏移量调整终端设备所属的目标终端群组，从而增强终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。In the information processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the terminal device acquires terminal group offset information, optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs, and based on the terminal group offset information, and determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy. The target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is adjusted by the terminal group offset, thereby enhancing the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
在上述基础上，考虑到同属于同一个终端群组的终端设备b和终端设备c，可能存在终端设备b的活跃度较高，终端设备c的活跃度较低的情况，此时，终端设备c本应较长时间的处于空闲态或非激活态或连接态，但由于同终端群组的终端设备b被寻呼的次数较多导致终端设备c也被频繁寻呼，增加终端设备c的耗电。因此，一些实施例中，终端群组偏移信息可以是根据与终端设备有关的通信行为确定的。On the basis of the above, considering that terminal equipment b and terminal equipment c belong to the same terminal group, there may be a situation in which the activity of terminal equipment b is high and the activity of terminal equipment c is low. c should have been in the idle state or inactive state or connected state for a long time, but because the terminal equipment b in the same terminal group is paged more times, the terminal equipment c is also frequently paged, increasing the number of the terminal equipment c. Power consumption. Therefore, in some embodiments, the terminal group offset information may be determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior may include at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率；The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within the preset duration;
等等。and many more.
例如，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为5个长的非连续接收周期(例如：1024ms乘以5的时间长度：5120ms)，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为1，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。For example, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal device is paged within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 5 long discontinuous reception periods (for example: 1024ms multiplied by 5 duration: 5120ms), if the number of times of paging the terminal (group) device is 3 within the 5120ms, Then, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the number of times of paging a terminal (group) device within the 5120 ms is 1, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据终端群组个数的配置更新确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，配置更新之前的终端群组个数为4，分别为终端群组1、终端群组2、终端群组3和终端群组4，更新终端群组配置，将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至任一其他终端群组。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively. When the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2 The terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于1/2，则确定终端群组偏移信息为0；或者，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/4，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 1024ms is greater than 1/2, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 0; If the probability of paging or waking up is less than 1/4, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2560ms，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined. The offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 2, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the terminal group offset is determined. information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 1, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, then the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability of the terminal equipment being paged or awakened within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, and referring to the above example, the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups , then it is determined that the terminal group offset information is 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, and the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups with reference to the above example group, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the number of times to page the terminal device is 2, and referring to the above example, set the terminal device in terminal group 2 If the terminal equipment is adjusted to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged is 1, And referring to the above example to adjust the terminal devices in the terminal group 2 to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
需说明的是，如上所述的预设时长、预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、终端群组个数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率中的任一数值，其实际大小均可以根据实际需求或历史经验进行设置，本申请不予限制。It should be noted that, any value in the preset duration, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration, the number of terminal groups, and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset duration is The actual size can be set according to actual needs or historical experience, which is not limited in this application.
可选地，终端设备需要确定该终端设备对应的目标终端群组，在后续应用中，终端设备基于该目标终端群组进行监听。Optionally, the terminal device needs to determine a target terminal group corresponding to the terminal device, and in subsequent applications, the terminal device performs monitoring based on the target terminal group.
可选地，终端设备根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组，可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the terminal device determines the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy, which may include at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
以下以终端群组偏移信息为一数值即偏移量为例，解释如何根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组：The following takes the terminal group offset information as a numerical value, namely the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
第一种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：确定终端设备的标识信息与终端群组偏移信息之和为中间值，即UE_ID+PG_OFFSET，可选地，PG_OFFSET表示终端群组偏移信息；根据该中间值确定目标终端群组。In the first implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
示例地，在相同寻呼范围内(可以是相同基站、相同AMF)存在四个终端设备，分别为：终端设备A1、终端设备B1、终端设备C1和终端设备D1。假设终端群组的分组方式为取mod 4，且PG_OFFSET皆为0，同时一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧仅存在1个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1，也就是四个终端设备皆在同一个寻呼时机“0”：For example, there are four terminal devices in the same paging range (which may be the same base station and the same AMF), namely: terminal device A1, terminal device B1, terminal device C1 and terminal device D1. It is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is mod 4, and PG_OFFSET is all 0, and there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period and only one paging occasion in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1, that is, the four terminal devices are all at the same paging occasion "0":
终端设备A1的UE_ID为768，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“0”，归类在1st终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device A1 is 768, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "0", and it is classified in the 1st terminal group;
终端设备B1的UE_ID为25，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“1”，归类在2nd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
终端设备C1的UE_ID为710，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
终端设备D1的UE_ID为2，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组。The UE_ID of the terminal device D1 is 2, after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", and it is classified into the 3rd terminal group.
可选地，终端设备D1因为较频繁使用数据传输、后台数据间歇性传输、或是较频繁接收语音电话等，导致终端设备D1频繁的在连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)以及非激活态间切换，被寻呼的概率大为增加，因此，同属相同终端群组的终端C1也常跟着被唤醒信号指示(1st终端群组以及3rd终端群组)唤醒并监听物理下行控制信道以及可能的解析物理下行共享信道而导致耗电，即便终端设备C1不做无线资源控制状态切换，但因为被唤醒已经形成耗电。Optionally, the terminal device D1 frequently switches between the connected state (RRC_CONNECTED) and the inactive state due to the frequent use of data transmission, the intermittent transmission of background data, or the more frequent reception of voice calls, etc. The probability of calling is greatly increased. Therefore, the terminals C1 that belong to the same terminal group are often awakened by the wake-up signal (1st terminal group and 3rd terminal group) and monitor the physical downlink control channel and possibly analyze the physical downlink shared channel. This leads to power consumption. Even if the terminal device C1 does not perform radio resource control state switching, power consumption has already occurred due to being woken up.
考虑到终端设备A1被寻呼的概率相对终端设备B1及终端设备C1要高，终端设备A1较频繁的在连接态以及非激活态间切换，因此网络设备评估可以动态调整终端设备D1归属至1st终端群组，因此可以通过无线资源控制信令指示终端设备D1的PG_OFFSET＝2，也就是终端设备D1：(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4＝0，被归类至1st终端群组。Considering that the probability of terminal equipment A1 being paged is higher than that of terminal equipment B1 and terminal equipment C1, terminal equipment A1 frequently switches between the connected state and the inactive state, so the network equipment evaluation can dynamically adjust the attribution of terminal equipment D1 to 1st. Therefore, the terminal device D1 can be instructed by radio resource control signaling that PG_OFFSET=2, that is, the terminal device D1: (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4=0, is classified into the 1st terminal group.
后续，网络设备则无需再唤醒3rd终端群组内的终端，因此终端设备C1可以持续保持睡眠，达到省电目的。Subsequently, the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
或者，也可以通过相同方式，将被寻呼概率较低的终端设备归类在一起，仍参考上述示例，可以将终端设备C1移至2nd终端群组。Alternatively, in the same way, the terminal devices with low probability of being paged can also be grouped together. Still referring to the above example, the terminal device C1 can be moved to the 2nd terminal group.
第二种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端设备的标识信息计算得到初始终端群组；确定初始终端群组与终端群组偏移信息之和为目标终端群组，例如，G UE(UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET，可选地，G UE(UE_ID)表示初始终端群组。 In the second implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may specifically include: calculating and obtaining the initial terminal group according to the identification information of the terminal equipment; The sum of the terminal group offset information is the target terminal group, for example, G UE (UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET, optionally, G UE (UE_ID) represents the initial terminal group.
作为一种示例，G UE(UE_ID)＝UE_ID/N G，N G表示终端群组个数，可以是依据网络规划的。在不同终端群组的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调整其所在终端群组，调整后的终端群组即目标终端群组。例如，N G＝4：终端群组a(UE_ID：0～255)、终端群组b(UE_ID：256～511)、终端群组c(UE_ID：512～767)、终端群组d(UE_ID：768～1023)，归类在终端群组a的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调至其他终端群组。 As an example, G UE (UE_ID)= UE_ID /NG , where NG represents the number of terminal groups, which may be based on network planning. Terminal devices in different terminal groups can adjust their terminal groups through PG_OFFSET, and the adjusted terminal group is the target terminal group. For example, N G =4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
作为另一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As another example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in one discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A(UE_ID：222)、终端设备B(UE_ID：322)、终端设备C(UE_ID：556)、终端设备D(UE_ID：668)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "0" are: terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E(UE_ID：111)、终端设备F(UE_ID：401)、终端设备G(UE_ID：607)、终端设备H(UE_ID：607)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "1" are: terminal device E (UE_ID: 111), terminal device F (UE_ID: 401), terminal device G (UE_ID: 607), and terminal device H (UE_ID: 607).
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A在1st终端群组，终端设备B在2nd终端群组，终端设备C和终端设备D在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A与终端设备C较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C调整至与终端设备A相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking paging occasion "0" as an example, terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group, terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group, and terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group. When terminal equipment A and terminal equipment C are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第三种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组。In a third implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal equipment currently belongs. terminal group.
作为一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As an example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A2、终端设备B2、终端设备C2、终端设备D2；在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E2、终端设备F2、终端设备G2。The terminal equipments at paging occasion "0" are: terminal equipment A2, terminal equipment B2, terminal equipment C2, terminal equipment D2; the terminal equipments at paging occasion "1" are: terminal equipment E2, terminal equipment F2, terminal equipment G2.
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A2在1st终端群组，终端设备B2在2nd终端群组，终端设备C2和终端设备D2在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A2与终端设备C2较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C2调整至与终端设备A2相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D2被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C2的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking the paging occasion "0" as an example, the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group, the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group, and the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group. When the terminal equipment A2 and the terminal equipment C2 are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第四种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。可选地，用于分组的参数可以包括但不限于终端群组的个数。示例地，假设终端群组的分组方式为：PG_Group＝floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G，可选地，PG_Group表示目标终端群组；其余各符号的含义如前所述。 In a fourth implementation manner, the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment, which may be specifically: according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping to determine the target terminal group. Optionally, the parameter for grouping may include but not limited to the number of terminal groups. For example, it is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is: PG_Group=floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G , optionally, PG_Group represents the target terminal group; the meanings of other symbols are as described above.
可选地，在本申请任一实施例中，终端设备的标识信息可以是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识和/或国际移动用户识别码确定的。参考长期演进系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据国际移动用户识别码确定的；新无线系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识确定的，但本申请实施例不以此为限制。Optionally, in any embodiment of the present application, the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity. In the reference long-term evolution system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：无线资源控制信令；非接入层信令。可选地，无线资源控制信令可以包括：无线资源控制重配置信令(RRCReconfiguration)、无线资源控制释放信令(RRCRelease)或无线资源控制恢复信令(RRCResume)等。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling. Optionally, the radio resource control signaling may include: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume), and the like.
可选地，非接入层信令包括配置更新命令(CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND)或注册接受信令(REGISTRATION ACCEPT)等。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
一些实施例中，信息处理方法还可以包括：终端设备接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。也就是说，网络设备可以通过非接入层信令(例如，配置更新命令或注册接受信令)为终端设备重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识。这里的网络设备可以为AMF。此时，终端设备可以根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组，进一步提升终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。In some embodiments, the information processing method may further include: the terminal device receiving the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling). The network device here can be AMF. At this time, the terminal device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity, so as to further improve the flexibility and/or controllability of terminal group grouping.
需说明的是，终端设备在根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组时，既可以仅基于该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，和/或，也可以结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，本申请实施例不予限制。其中，终端设备结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组的具体实现可参考上述实施例，将其中的5G服务临时移动用户标识更新为重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识即可。It should be noted that, when the terminal device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. , and/or, the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The specific implementation of determining the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity can refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary mobile user identity is updated as It is enough to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
图4为本申请另一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图。本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于如上所述的网络设备，包括无线接入网设备和/或核心网设备。如图4所示，本实施例的方法包括以下步骤：FIG. 4 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application. The embodiments of the present application provide an information processing method, which is applied to the above-mentioned network devices, including wireless access network devices and/or core network devices. As shown in Figure 4, the method of this embodiment includes the following steps:
S401、判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件。S401. Determine whether preset parameters of the terminal device meet preset conditions.
可选地，网络设备实时检测或定期检测终端设备的预设参数，判断该预设参数是否符合预设条件，例如，预设条件为预设参数的值大于预设值，即某一固定值，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，则认为预设参数符合预设条件；若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，则认为预设参数不符合预设条件。可选地，上述固定值可以为预设阈值，或者，该固定值为动态确定或生成的值。Optionally, the network device detects in real time or periodically detects the preset parameters of the terminal device, and determines whether the preset parameters meet the preset conditions. For example, the preset conditions are that the value of the preset parameter is greater than the preset value, that is, a certain fixed value. , if the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it is considered that the preset parameter meets the preset condition; if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, it is considered that the preset parameter does not meet the preset condition. Optionally, the above-mentioned fixed value may be a preset threshold value, or the fixed value may be dynamically determined or generated.
可选地，预设参数的选取可以根据实际情况或历史经验确定。相应地，预设条件可根据预设参数的特性进行设置。Optionally, the selection of preset parameters may be determined according to actual conditions or historical experience. Accordingly, the preset conditions may be set according to the characteristics of the preset parameters.
可选地，预设参数可以为至少一个。此时，不同预设参数可以对应有不同的预设条件，即预设参数与预设条件是一一对应的；和/或，预设条件是多个预设参数对应的预设条件，即预设参数与预设条件是多对一的关系。Optionally, the preset parameter may be at least one. In this case, different preset parameters may correspond to different preset conditions, that is, preset parameters and preset conditions are in one-to-one correspondence; and/or, the preset conditions are preset conditions corresponding to multiple preset parameters, that is There is a many-to-one relationship between preset parameters and preset conditions.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备 的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
若是，则网络设备执行S402；和/或，若否，则结束流程。If yes, the network device executes S402; and/or, if not, the process ends.
S402、根据预设参数确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息。S402. Determine terminal group offset information of the terminal device according to preset parameters.
可选地，对于同一预设参数，其不同的取值范围/取值可以对应有不同的终端群组偏移信息，这样就可以根据预设参数的当前取值确定对应的终端群组偏移信息。或者，对于不同预设参数，在某取值下可以对应相同的终端群组偏移信息。预设参数和终端群组偏移信息的对应关系可根据实际需求或历史经验进行设置。Optionally, for the same preset parameter, different value ranges/values may correspond to different terminal group offset information, so that the corresponding terminal group offset can be determined according to the current value of the preset parameter. information. Alternatively, for different preset parameters, a certain value may correspond to the same terminal group offset information. The corresponding relationship between the preset parameters and the terminal group offset information can be set according to actual requirements or historical experience.
在本申请实施例提供的信息处理方法中，网络设备判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件，并在终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件时，根据预设参数确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息，以通过终端群组偏移量调整终端设备所属的目标终端群组，从而增强终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。In the information processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines whether the preset parameter of the terminal device meets the preset condition, and when the preset parameter of the terminal device meets the preset condition, determines the terminal of the terminal device according to the preset parameter The group offset information is used to adjust the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs through the terminal group offset, thereby enhancing the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
在上述基础上，考虑到同属于同一个终端群组的终端设备b和终端设备c，可能存在终端设备b的活跃度较高，终端设备c的活跃度较低的情况，此时，终端设备c本应较长时间的处于空闲态或非激活态，但由于同终端群组的终端设备b被寻呼的次数较多导致终端设备c也被频繁寻呼，增加终端设备c的耗电。因此，一些实施例中，预设参数是与终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数。On the basis of the above, considering that terminal equipment b and terminal equipment c belong to the same terminal group, there may be a situation in which the activity of terminal equipment b is high and the activity of terminal equipment c is low. c should be in an idle or inactive state for a long time, but because the terminal equipment b in the same terminal group is paged more times, the terminal equipment c is also frequently paged, which increases the power consumption of the terminal equipment c. Therefore, in some embodiments, the preset parameters are parameters related to the communication behavior of the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior may include at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率；The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within the preset duration;
等等。and many more.
例如，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为5个长的非连续接收周期(例如：1024ms乘以5的时间长度：5120ms)，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为1，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。For example, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal device is paged within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 5 long discontinuous reception periods (for example: 1024ms multiplied by 5 duration: 5120ms), if the number of times of paging the terminal (group) device is 3 within the 5120ms, Then, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the number of times of paging a terminal (group) device within the 5120 ms is 1, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据终端群组个数的配置更新确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，配置更新之前的终端群组个数为4，分别为终端群组1、终端群组2、终端群组3和终端群组4，更新终端群组配置，将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至任一其他终端群组。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively. When the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2 The terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于1/2，则确定终端群组偏移信息为0；或者，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/4，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 1024ms is greater than 1/2, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 0; If the probability of paging or waking up is less than 1/4, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2560ms，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined. The offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 2, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the terminal group offset is determined. information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 1, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, then the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability of the terminal equipment being paged or awakened within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, and referring to the above example, the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups , then it is determined that the terminal group offset information is 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, and the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups with reference to the above example group, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the number of times to page the terminal device is 2, and referring to the above example, set the terminal device in terminal group 2 If the terminal equipment is adjusted to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged is 1, And referring to the above example to adjust the terminal devices in the terminal group 2 to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
需说明的是，如上所述的预设时长、预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、终端群组个数以及预设时 长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率中的任一数值，其实际大小均可以根据实际需求或历史经验进行设置，本申请不予限制。It should be noted that, any value in the preset duration, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration, the number of terminal groups, and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset duration is The actual size can be set according to actual needs or historical experience, which is not limited in this application.
可选地，网络设备需要确定终端设备对应的目标终端群组，在后续应用中，网络设备根据该目标终端群组进行寻呼。Optionally, the network device needs to determine a target terminal group corresponding to the terminal device, and in subsequent applications, the network device performs paging according to the target terminal group.
可选地，网络设备根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组，可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the network device determines the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy, which may include at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
以下以终端群组偏移信息为一数值，即偏移量为例解释如何根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组：The following takes the terminal group offset information as a value, that is, the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
第一种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：确定终端设备的标识信息与终端群组偏移信息之和为中间值，即UE_ID+PG_OFFSET，可选地，PG_OFFSET表示终端群组偏移信息；根据该中间值确定目标终端群组。In the first implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
示例地，在相同寻呼范围内(可以是相同基站、相同AMF)存在四个终端设备，分别为：终端设备A1、终端设备B1、终端设备C1和终端设备D1。假设终端群组的分组方式为取mod 4，且PG_OFFSET皆为0，同时一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧仅存在1个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1，也就是四个终端设备皆在同一个寻呼时机“0”：For example, there are four terminal devices in the same paging range (which may be the same base station and the same AMF), namely: terminal device A1, terminal device B1, terminal device C1 and terminal device D1. It is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is mod 4, and PG_OFFSET is all 0, and there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period and only one paging occasion in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1, that is, the four terminal devices are all at the same paging occasion "0":
终端设备A1的UE_ID为768，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“0”，归类在1st终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device A1 is 768, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "0", and it is classified in the 1st terminal group;
终端设备B1的UE_ID为25，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“1”，归类在2nd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
终端设备C1的UE_ID为710，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
终端设备D1的UE_ID为2，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组。The UE_ID of the terminal device D1 is 2, after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", and it is classified into the 3rd terminal group.
可选地，终端设备D1因为较频繁使用数据传输、后台数据间歇性传输、或是较频繁接收语音电话等，导致终端设备D1频繁的在连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)以及非激活态间切换，被寻呼的概率大为增加，因此，同属相同终端群组的终端C1也常跟着被唤醒信号指示(1st终端群组以及3rd终端群组)唤醒并监听物理下行控制信道以及可能的解析物理下行共享信道而导致耗电，即便终端设备C1不做无线资源控制状态切换，但因为被唤醒已经形成耗电。Optionally, the terminal device D1 frequently switches between the connected state (RRC_CONNECTED) and the inactive state due to the frequent use of data transmission, the intermittent transmission of background data, or the more frequent reception of voice calls, etc. The probability of calling is greatly increased. Therefore, the terminals C1 that belong to the same terminal group are often awakened by the wake-up signal (1st terminal group and 3rd terminal group) and monitor the physical downlink control channel and possibly analyze the physical downlink shared channel. This leads to power consumption. Even if the terminal device C1 does not perform radio resource control state switching, power consumption has already occurred due to being woken up.
考虑到终端设备A1被寻呼的概率相对终端设备B1及终端设备C1要高，终端设备A1较频繁的在连接态以及非激活态间切换，因此网络设备评估可以动态调整终端设备D1归属至1st终端群组，因此可以通过无线资源控制信令指示终端设备D1的PG_OFFSET＝2，也就是终端设备D1：(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4＝0，被归类至1st终端群组。Considering that the probability of terminal equipment A1 being paged is higher than that of terminal equipment B1 and terminal equipment C1, terminal equipment A1 frequently switches between the connected state and the inactive state, so the network equipment evaluation can dynamically adjust the attribution of terminal equipment D1 to 1st. Therefore, the terminal device D1 can be instructed by radio resource control signaling that PG_OFFSET=2, that is, the terminal device D1: (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4=0, is classified into the 1st terminal group.
后续，网络设备则无需再唤醒3rd终端群组内的终端，因此终端设备C1可以持续保持睡眠，达到省电目的。Subsequently, the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
或者，也可以通过相同方式，将被寻呼概率较低的终端设备归类在一起，仍参考上述示例，可以将终端设备C1移至2nd终端群组。Alternatively, in the same way, the terminal devices with low probability of being paged can also be grouped together. Still referring to the above example, the terminal device C1 can be moved to the 2nd terminal group.
第二种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端设备的标识信息计算得到初始终端群组；确定初始终端群组与终端群组偏移信息之和为目标终端群组，例如，G UE(UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET，可选地，G UE(UE_ID)表示初始终端群组。 In the second implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may specifically include: calculating and obtaining the initial terminal group according to the identification information of the terminal equipment; The sum of the terminal group offset information is the target terminal group, for example, G UE (UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET, optionally, G UE (UE_ID) represents the initial terminal group.
作为一种示例，G UE(UE_ID)＝UE_ID/N G，N G表示终端群组个数，可以是依据网络规划的。在不同终端群组的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调整其所在终端群组，调整后的终端群组即目标终端群组。例如，N G＝4：终端群组a(UE_ID：0～255)、终端群组b(UE_ID：256～511)、终端群组c(UE_ID：512～767)、终端群组d(UE_ID：768～1023)，归类在终端群组a的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调至其他终端群组。 As an example, G UE (UE_ID)= UE_ID /NG , where NG represents the number of terminal groups, which may be based on network planning. Terminal devices in different terminal groups can adjust their terminal groups through PG_OFFSET, and the adjusted terminal group is the target terminal group. For example, N G =4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
作为另一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As another example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in one discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A(UE_ID：222)、终端设备B(UE_ID：322)、终端设备C(UE_ID：556)、终端设备D(UE_ID：668)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "0" are: terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E(UE_ID：111)、终端设备F(UE_ID：401)、终端设备G(UE_ID：607)、终端设备H(UE_ID：607)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "1" are: terminal device E (UE_ID: 111), terminal device F (UE_ID: 401), terminal device G (UE_ID: 607), and terminal device H (UE_ID: 607).
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A在1st终端群组，终端设备B在2nd终端群组，终端设备C和终端设备D在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A与终端设备C较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C调整至与终端设备A相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking paging occasion "0" as an example, terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group, terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group, and terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group. When terminal equipment A and terminal equipment C are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第三种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组。In a third implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal equipment currently belongs. terminal group.
作为一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As an example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A2、终端设备B2、终端设备C2、终端设备D2；在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E2、终端设备F2、终端设备G2。The terminal equipments at paging occasion "0" are: terminal equipment A2, terminal equipment B2, terminal equipment C2, terminal equipment D2; the terminal equipments at paging occasion "1" are: terminal equipment E2, terminal equipment F2, terminal equipment G2.
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A2在1st终端群组，终端设备B2在2nd终端群组，终端设备C2和终端设备D2在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A2与终端设备C2较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C2调整至与终端设备A2相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D2被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C2的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking the paging occasion "0" as an example, the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group, the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group, and the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group. When the terminal equipment A2 and the terminal equipment C2 are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第四种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。可选地，用于分组的参数可以包括但不限于终端群组的个数。示例地，假设终端群组的分组方式为：PG_Group＝floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G，可选地，PG_Group表示目标终端群组；其余各符号的含义如前所述。 In a fourth implementation manner, the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment, which may be specifically: according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping to determine the target terminal group. Optionally, the parameter for grouping may include but not limited to the number of terminal groups. For example, it is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is: PG_Group=floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G , optionally, PG_Group represents the target terminal group; the meanings of other symbols are as described above.
可选地，在本申请任一实施例中，终端设备的标识信息可以是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识和/或国际移动用户识别码确定的。参考长期演进系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据国际移动用户识别码确定的；新无线系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识确定的，但本申请实施例不以此为限制。Optionally, in any embodiment of the present application, the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity. In the reference long-term evolution system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：无线资源控制信令；非接入层信令。可选地，无线资源控制信令可以包括：无线资源控制重配置信令(RRCReconfiguration)、无线资源控制释放信令(RRCRelease)或无线资源控制恢复信令(RRCResume)等。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling. Optionally, the radio resource control signaling may include: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume), and the like.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令(CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND)或注册接受信令(REGISTRATION ACCEPT)等。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
一些实施例中，信息处理方法还可以包括：网络设备发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。也就是说，网络设备可以通过非接入层信令(例如，配置更新命令或注册接受信令)为终端设备重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识。这里的网络设备可以为AMF。此时，终端设备和/或网络设备可以根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组，进一步提升终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。In some embodiments, the information processing method may further include: the network device sending the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling). The network device here can be AMF. At this time, the terminal device and/or the network device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, further improving the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
需说明的是，终端设备和/或网络设备在根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组时，既可以仅基于该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，和/或，也可以结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，本申请实施例不予限制。其中，终端设备和/或网络设备结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组的具体实现可参考上述实施例，将其中的5G服务临时移动用户标识更新为重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识即可。It should be noted that, when the terminal device and/or the network device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. and/or, the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The specific implementation of the terminal device and/or network device to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary The mobile user identity is updated to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
对于终端群组偏移信息的实际应用，可参考如下实施例：For the practical application of terminal group offset information, reference may be made to the following embodiments:
图5为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图。本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于终端设备。如图5所示，本实施例的方法包括以下步骤：FIG. 5 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application. An embodiment of the present application provides an information processing method, which is applied to a terminal device. As shown in Figure 5, the method of this embodiment includes the following steps:
S501、接收目标信息，目标信息携带有终端群组的指示信息。S501. Receive target information, where the target information carries indication information of a terminal group.
可选地，终端设备接收来自网络设备的目标信息。Optionally, the terminal device receives target information from the network device.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：WUS(Wake Up Signal，唤醒信号)、寻呼指示，例如，PEI(Paging Early Indication，寻呼提前指示)。Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following: WUS (Wake Up Signal, wake-up signal), paging indication, for example, PEI (Paging Early Indication, paging advance indication).
可选地，唤醒信号还可以是DCP(DCI with CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI，以PS-RNTI加扰的下行 控信令与CRC)，其中，CRC(Cyclic Redundancy Check)为循环冗余效验。Optionally, the wake-up signal can also be DCP (DCI with CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI, downlink control signaling and CRC scrambled by PS-RNTI), wherein CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a cyclic redundancy check.
S502、确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组。S502. Confirm whether the terminal group is the target terminal group.
可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组，关于终端群组偏移信息及目标终端群组的相关描述可参考前述实施例，此处不再赘述。Optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on the terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs. Referring to the foregoing embodiments, details are not repeated here.
在接收到目标信息之后，终端设备需确认当前所属的终端群组是否为目标终端群组。若是，则执行S503、基于目标终端群组进行相应处理；和/或，若否，则结束流程。After receiving the target information, the terminal device needs to confirm whether the terminal group to which it currently belongs is the target terminal group. If yes, execute S503, perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group; and/or, if not, end the process.
本申请实施例中，终端设备在接收目标信息之后，目标信息携带有终端群组的指示信息，确认该终端群组是否为目标终端群组，并在该终端群组为目标终端群组时基于目标终端群组进行相应处理，以节省功耗。In this embodiment of the present application, after the terminal device receives the target information, the target information carries the indication information of the terminal group, confirms whether the terminal group is the target terminal group, and determines whether the terminal group is the target terminal group based on The target terminal group performs corresponding processing to save power consumption.
可选地，基于目标终端群组进行相应处理，可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the corresponding processing based on the target terminal group may include at least one of the following:
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，监听物理下行控制信道；Monitor the physical downlink control channel according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，接收短消息；Receive short messages according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据寻呼指示所指示的终端群组信息，解析物理下行共享信道。The physical downlink shared channel is parsed according to the terminal group information indicated by the paging indication.
例如，终端设备接收网络设备下发的唤醒信号，所述唤醒信号指示需要监听物理下行控制信道的寻呼指示的终端群组；终端设备根据寻呼指示解析物理下行共享信道并获取短消息服务(SMS，Short Message Service)。或者，终端设备接收网络设备下发的唤醒信号，所述唤醒信号指示需要监听物理下行控制信道的短消息的终端群组；终端设备根据短消息获取更新后的系统消息或PWS信息。或者，终端设备监听物理下行控制信道的寻呼指示，再根据寻呼指示确定需要解析物理下行控制信道的终端群组并获取短消息服务(SMS，Short Message Service)。For example, the terminal device receives a wake-up signal sent by the network device, and the wake-up signal indicates a terminal group that needs to monitor the paging instruction of the physical downlink control channel; the terminal device parses the physical downlink shared channel according to the paging instruction and obtains the short message service ( SMS, Short Message Service). Alternatively, the terminal device receives a wake-up signal sent by the network device, where the wake-up signal indicates a terminal group that needs to monitor the short message of the physical downlink control channel; the terminal device obtains the updated system message or PWS information according to the short message. Alternatively, the terminal device monitors the paging indication of the physical downlink control channel, and then determines the terminal group that needs to parse the physical downlink control channel according to the paging indication, and obtains a Short Message Service (SMS, Short Message Service).
可选地，终端设备在监听物理下行控制信道时，不开启解析物理下行共享信道的电路，待确定监听的物理下行控制信道指示所属终端群组需要解析物理下行共享信道，在相应的延时时隙点解析物理下行共享信道。Optionally, when the terminal device monitors the physical downlink control channel, the circuit for parsing the physical downlink shared channel is not turned on, and the physical downlink control channel to be monitored indicates that the terminal group to which it belongs needs to parse the physical downlink shared channel. The slot point resolves the physical downlink shared channel.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：无线资源控制信令；非接入层信令。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令可以包括以下至少一种：无线资源控制重配置信令(RRCReconfiguration)、无线资源控制释放信令(RRCRelease)或无线资源控制恢复信令(RRCResume)等。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling may include at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), or radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume).
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令(CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND)或注册接受信令(REGISTRATION ACCEPT)等。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
例如，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为5个长的非连续接收周期(例如：1024ms乘以5的时间长度：5120ms)，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为1，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。For example, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal device is paged within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 5 long discontinuous reception periods (for example: 1024ms multiplied by 5 duration: 5120ms), if the number of times of paging the terminal (group) device is 3 within the 5120ms, Then, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the number of times of paging a terminal (group) device within the 5120 ms is 1, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据终端群组个数的配置更新确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，配置更新之前的终端群组个数为4，分别为终端群组1、终端群组2、终端群组3和终端群组4，更新终端群组配置，将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至任一其他终端群组。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively. When the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2 The terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于1/2，则确定终端群组偏移信息为0；或者，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/4，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 1024ms is greater than 1/2, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 0; If the probability of paging or waking up is less than 1/4, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2560ms，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined. The offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 2, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the terminal group offset is determined. information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 1, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, then the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群 组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability of the terminal equipment being paged or awakened within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, and referring to the above example, the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups , then it is determined that the terminal group offset information is 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, and the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups with reference to the above example group, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the number of times to page the terminal device is 2, and referring to the above example, set the terminal device in terminal group 2 If the terminal equipment is adjusted to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged is 1, And referring to the above example to adjust the terminal devices in the terminal group 2 to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
需说明的是，如上所述的预设时长、预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、终端群组个数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率中的任一数值，其实际大小均可以根据实际需求或历史经验进行设置，本申请不予限制。It should be noted that, any value in the preset duration, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration, the number of terminal groups, and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset duration is The actual size can be set according to actual needs or historical experience, which is not limited in this application.
可选地，终端设备需要确定终端设备对应的目标终端群组，在后续应用中，终端设备基于该目标终端群组进行监听。Optionally, the terminal device needs to determine a target terminal group corresponding to the terminal device, and in subsequent applications, the terminal device performs monitoring based on the target terminal group.
可选地，目标终端群组是根据根据终端群组偏移信息确定的，可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group is determined according to terminal group offset information, and may include at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
以下以终端群组偏移信息为一数值，即偏移量为例解释如何根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组：The following takes the terminal group offset information as a value, that is, the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
第一种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：确定终端设备的标识信息与终端群组偏移信息之和为中间值，即UE_ID+PG_OFFSET，可选地，PG_OFFSET表示终端群组偏移信息；根据该中间值确定目标终端群组。In the first implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
示例地，在相同寻呼范围内(可以是相同基站、相同AMF)存在四个终端设备，分别为：终端设备A1、终端设备B1、终端设备C1和终端设备D1。假设终端群组的分组方式为取mod 4，且PG_OFFSET皆为0，同时一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧仅存在1个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1，也就是四个终端设备皆在同一个寻呼时机“0”：For example, there are four terminal devices in the same paging range (which may be the same base station and the same AMF), namely: terminal device A1, terminal device B1, terminal device C1 and terminal device D1. It is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is mod 4, and PG_OFFSET is all 0, and there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period and only one paging occasion in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1, that is, the four terminal devices are all at the same paging occasion "0":
终端设备A1的UE_ID为768，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“0”，归类在1st终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device A1 is 768, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "0", and it is classified in the 1st terminal group;
终端设备B1的UE_ID为25，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“1”，归类在2nd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
终端设备C1的UE_ID为710，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
终端设备D1的UE_ID为2，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组。The UE_ID of the terminal device D1 is 2, after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", and it is classified into the 3rd terminal group.
可选地，终端设备D1因为较频繁使用数据传输、后台数据间歇性传输、或是较频繁接收语音电话等，导致终端设备D1频繁的在连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)以及非激活态间切换，被寻呼的概率大为增加，因此，同属相同终端群组的终端C1也常跟着被唤醒信号指示(1st终端群组以及3rd终端群组)唤醒并监听物理下行控制信道以及可能的解析物理下行共享信道而导致耗电，即便终端设备C1不做无线资源控制状态切换，但因为被唤醒已经形成耗电。Optionally, the terminal device D1 frequently switches between the connected state (RRC_CONNECTED) and the inactive state due to the frequent use of data transmission, the intermittent transmission of background data, or the more frequent reception of voice calls, etc. The probability of calling is greatly increased. Therefore, the terminals C1 that belong to the same terminal group are often awakened by the wake-up signal (1st terminal group and 3rd terminal group) and monitor the physical downlink control channel and possibly analyze the physical downlink shared channel. This leads to power consumption. Even if the terminal device C1 does not perform radio resource control state switching, power consumption has already occurred due to being woken up.
考虑到终端设备A1被寻呼的概率相对终端设备B1及终端设备C1要高，终端设备A1较频繁的在连接态以及非激活态间切换，因此网络设备评估可以动态调整终端设备D1归属至1st终端群组，因此可以通过无线资源控制信令指示终端设备D1的PG_OFFSET＝2，也就是终端设备D1：(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4＝0，被归类至1st终端群组。Considering that the probability of terminal equipment A1 being paged is higher than that of terminal equipment B1 and terminal equipment C1, terminal equipment A1 frequently switches between the connected state and the inactive state, so the network equipment evaluation can dynamically adjust the attribution of terminal equipment D1 to 1st. Therefore, the terminal device D1 can be instructed by radio resource control signaling that PG_OFFSET=2, that is, the terminal device D1: (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4=0, is classified into the 1st terminal group.
后续，网络设备则无需再唤醒3rd终端群组内的终端，因此终端设备C1可以持续保持睡眠，达到省电目的。Subsequently, the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
或者，也可以通过相同方式，将被寻呼概率较低的终端设备归类在一起，仍参考上述示例，可以将终端设备C1移至2nd终端群组。Alternatively, in the same way, the terminal devices with low probability of being paged can also be grouped together. Still referring to the above example, the terminal device C1 can be moved to the 2nd terminal group.
第二种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端设备的标识信息计算得到初始终端群组；确定初始终端群组与终端群组偏移信息之和为目标终端群组，例如，G UE(UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET，可选地，G UE(UE_ID)表示初始终端群组。 In the second implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may specifically include: calculating and obtaining the initial terminal group according to the identification information of the terminal equipment; The sum of the terminal group offset information is the target terminal group, for example, G UE (UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET, optionally, G UE (UE_ID) represents the initial terminal group.
作为一种示例，G UE(UE_ID)＝UE_ID/N G，N G表示终端群组个数，可以是依据网络规划的。在不同终端群组的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调整其所在终端群组，调整后的终端群组即目标终端群组。例如，N G＝4：终端群组a(UE_ID：0～255)、终端群组b(UE_ID：256～511)、终端群组c(UE_ID：512～767)、终端群组d(UE_ID：768～1023)，归类在终端群组a的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调至其他终端群组。 As an example, G UE (UE_ID)= UE_ID /NG , where NG represents the number of terminal groups, which may be based on network planning. Terminal devices in different terminal groups can adjust their terminal groups through PG_OFFSET, and the adjusted terminal group is the target terminal group. For example, N G =4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
作为另一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As another example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in one discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A(UE_ID：222)、终端设备B(UE_ID：322)、终端设备C(UE_ID：556)、终端设备D(UE_ID：668)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "0" are: terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E(UE_ID：111)、终端设备F(UE_ID：401)、终端设备G(UE_ID：607)、终端设备H(UE_ID：607)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "1" are: terminal device E (UE_ID: 111), terminal device F (UE_ID: 401), terminal device G (UE_ID: 607), and terminal device H (UE_ID: 607).
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A在1st终端群组，终端设备B在2nd终端群组，终端设备C和终端设备D在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A与终端设备C较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C调整至与终端设备A相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking paging occasion "0" as an example, terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group, terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group, and terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group. When terminal equipment A and terminal equipment C are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第三种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组。In a third implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal equipment currently belongs. terminal group.
作为一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As an example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A2、终端设备B2、终端设备C2、终端设备D2；在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E2、终端设备F2、终端设备G2。The terminal equipments at paging occasion "0" are: terminal equipment A2, terminal equipment B2, terminal equipment C2, terminal equipment D2; the terminal equipments at paging occasion "1" are: terminal equipment E2, terminal equipment F2, terminal equipment G2.
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A2在1st终端群组，终端设备B2在2nd终端群组，终端设备C2和终端设备D2在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A2与终端设备C2较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C2调整至与终端设备A2相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D2被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C2的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking the paging occasion "0" as an example, the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group, the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group, and the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group. When the terminal equipment A2 and the terminal equipment C2 are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第四种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。可选地，用于分组的参数可以包括但不限于终端群组的个数。示例地，假设终端群组的分组方式为：PG_Group＝floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G，可选地，PG_Group表示目标终端群组；其余各符号的含义如前所述。 In a fourth implementation manner, the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment, which may be specifically: according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping to determine the target terminal group. Optionally, the parameter for grouping may include but not limited to the number of terminal groups. For example, it is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is: PG_Group=floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G , optionally, PG_Group represents the target terminal group; the meanings of other symbols are as described above.
可选地，在本申请任一实施例中，终端设备的标识信息可以是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识和/或国际移动用户识别码确定的。参考长期演进系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据国际移动用户识别码确定的；新无线系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识确定的，但本申请实施例不以此为限制。Optionally, in any embodiment of the present application, the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity. In the reference long-term evolution system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
一些实施例中，信息处理方法还可以包括：终端设备接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。也就是说，网络设备可以通过非接入层信令(例如，配置更新命令或注册接受信令)为终端设备重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识。这里的网络设备可以为AMF。此时，终端设备可以根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组，进一步提升终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。In some embodiments, the information processing method may further include: the terminal device receiving the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling). The network device here can be AMF. At this time, the terminal device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity, so as to further improve the flexibility and/or controllability of terminal group grouping.
需说明的是，终端设备在根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组时，既可以仅基于该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，和/或，也可以结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，本申请实施例不予限制。其中，终端设备结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组的具体实现可参考上述实施例，将其中的5G服务临时移动用户标识更新为重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识即可。It should be noted that, when the terminal device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. , and/or, the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The specific implementation of determining the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity can refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary mobile user identity is updated as It is enough to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
图6为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理方法的流程示意图。本申请实施例提供一种信息处理方法，应用于网络设备，包括无线接入网设备和/或核心网设备。如图6所示，本实施例的方法包括以下步骤：FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of an information processing method provided by another embodiment of the present application. The embodiments of the present application provide an information processing method, which is applied to network devices, including wireless access network devices and/or core network devices. As shown in Figure 6, the method of this embodiment includes the following steps:
S601、判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件。S601. Determine whether a preset parameter of a terminal device complies with a preset condition.
可选地，网络设备实时检测或定期检测终端设备的预设参数，判断该预设参数是否符合预设条件，例如，预设条件为预设参数的值大于某一固定值，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，则认为预设参数符合预设条件；若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，则认为预设参数不符合预设条件。可选地，上述固定值可以为预设阈值，或者，该固定值为动态确定或生成的值。Optionally, the network device detects or periodically detects the preset parameters of the terminal device, and determines whether the preset parameters meet the preset conditions. For example, the preset conditions are that the value of the preset parameters is greater than a certain fixed value. If the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it is considered that the preset parameter meets the preset condition; if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, it is considered that the preset parameter does not meet the preset condition. Optionally, the above-mentioned fixed value may be a preset threshold value, or the fixed value may be dynamically determined or generated.
可选地，预设参数的选取可以根据实际情况或历史经验确定。相应地，预设条件可根据预设参数的特性进行设置。Optionally, the selection of preset parameters may be determined according to actual conditions or historical experience. Accordingly, the preset conditions may be set according to the characteristics of the preset parameters.
可选地，预设参数可以为至少一个。此时，不同预设参数可以对应有不同的预设条件，即预设参数与预设条件是一一对应的；和/或，预设条件是多个预设参数对应的预设条件，即预设参数与预设条件是多对一的关系。Optionally, the preset parameter may be at least one. In this case, different preset parameters may correspond to different preset conditions, that is, preset parameters and preset conditions are in one-to-one correspondence; and/or, the preset conditions are preset conditions corresponding to multiple preset parameters, that is There is a many-to-one relationship between preset parameters and preset conditions.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
若是，则执行S602、发送目标信息，目标信息携带有终端设备所属的终端群组的指示信息；和/或，若否，则结束流程。If yes, execute S602, send target information, where the target information carries indication information of the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs; and/or, if not, end the process.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：唤醒信号、寻呼指示，例如，寻呼提前指示。Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following: a wake-up signal and a paging indication, for example, a paging advance indication.
可选地，唤醒信号还可以是DCP信号。Optionally, the wake-up signal may also be a DCP signal.
S603、确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组。S603. Confirm whether the terminal group is the target terminal group.
可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组,。Optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs.
若是，则S604、基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。和/或，若否，则基于非目标终端群组进行相应处理。If so, in S604, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group. And/or, if not, perform corresponding processing based on the non-target terminal group.
在本申请实施例提供的信息处理方法中，网络设备判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件，在终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件时，发送目标信息，目标信息携带有终端设备所属的终端群组的指示信息，并确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，在终端群组为目标终端群组时，基于目标终端群组进行相应处理，以节省终端设备的功耗。In the information processing method provided by the embodiment of the present application, the network device determines whether the preset parameters of the terminal device meet the preset conditions, and when the preset parameters of the terminal device meet the preset conditions, the target information is sent, and the target information carries the terminal device. The indication information of the terminal group to which it belongs, and confirm whether the terminal group is the target terminal group. When the terminal group is the target terminal group, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group to save the power consumption of the terminal device.
在上述基础上，可选地，基于目标终端群组进行相应处理，包括以下至少一种：On the above basis, optionally, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group, including at least one of the following:
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送包含寻呼无线网络临时标识的信息；Based on the target terminal group, send information including the temporary identity of the paging wireless network through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送短信息；Based on the target terminal group, send short messages through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理共享控制信道发送寻呼消息。Based on the target terminal group, the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
可选地，基于非目标终端群组进行相应处理，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, corresponding processing is performed based on the non-target terminal group, including at least one of the following:
基于非目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送包含寻呼无线网络临时标识的信息；Based on the non-target terminal group, send information including the temporary identification of the paging wireless network through the physical downlink control channel;
基于非目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送短信息；Send short messages through physical downlink control channels based on non-target terminal groups;
基于非目标终端群组，通过物理共享控制信道发送寻呼消息。Based on the non-target terminal group, the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
可选地，信息处理方法还包括：网络设备发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。也就是说，网络设备可以通过非接入层信令(例如，配置更新命令或注册接受信令)为终端设备重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识。这里的网络设备可以为AMF。此时，终端设备和/或网络设备可以根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组，进一步提升终端群组分组的弹性和/或可控性。Optionally, the information processing method further includes: the network device sending the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. That is, the network device can reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity for the terminal device through non-access stratum signaling (eg, configuration update command or registration accept signaling). The network device here can be AMF. At this time, the terminal device and/or the network device can determine the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, further improving the flexibility and/or controllability of the terminal group grouping.
需说明的是，终端设备和/或网络设备在根据该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识确定其所属的目标终端群组时，既可以仅基于该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，和/或，也可以结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组，本申请实施例不予限制。其中，终端设备和/或网络设备结合终端群组偏移信息和该重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识来确定其所属的目标终端群组的具体实现可参考上述实施例，将其中的5G服务临时移动用户标识更新为重配置5G服务临时移动用户标识即可。It should be noted that, when the terminal device and/or the network device determines the target terminal group to which it belongs according to the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity, it can only determine the target terminal group to which it belongs based on the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity. and/or, the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may also be combined to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The specific implementation of the terminal device and/or network device to determine the target terminal group to which it belongs by combining the terminal group offset information and the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity may refer to the above embodiment, and the 5G service temporary The mobile user identity is updated to reconfigure the 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：无线资源控制信令；非接入层信令。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following: radio resource control signaling; non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令可以包括以下至少一种：无线资源控制重配置信令(RRCReconfiguration)、无线资源控制释放信令(RRCRelease)或无线资源控制恢复信令(RRCResume)等。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling may include at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling (RRCReconfiguration), radio resource control release signaling (RRCRelease), or radio resource control recovery signaling (RRCResume).
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令(CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND)或注册接受信令(REGISTRATION ACCEPT)等。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command (CONFIGURATION UPDATE COMMAND) or a registration acceptance signaling (REGISTRATION ACCEPT) and the like.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
例如，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为5个长的非连续接收周期(例如：1024ms乘以5的时间长度：5120ms)，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若这5120ms内寻呼终端(群组)设备的次数为1，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。For example, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal device is paged within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 5 long discontinuous reception periods (for example: 1024ms multiplied by 5 duration: 5120ms), if the number of times of paging the terminal (group) device is 3 within the 5120ms, Then, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the number of times of paging a terminal (group) device within the 5120 ms is 1, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据终端群组个数的配置更新确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，配置更新之前的终端群组个数为4，分别为终端群组1、终端群组2、终端群组3和终端群组4，更新终端群组配置，将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至任一其他终端群组。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the number of terminal groups before the configuration update is 4, which are terminal group 1, terminal group 2, terminal group 3, and terminal group 4, respectively. When the terminal group configuration is updated, the terminal group 2 The terminal devices in are adjusted to any other terminal group.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于1/2，则确定终端群组偏移信息为0；或者，若1024ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/4，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 1024ms is greater than 1/2, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 0; If the probability of paging or waking up is less than 1/4, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2560ms，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2560ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times of paging the terminal device and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups within a preset time period. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2560ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 3, and the terminal device in the terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group is determined. The offset information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 2560ms is 1, and the terminal device in terminal group 2 is adjusted to another terminal group with reference to the above example, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1 ,and many more.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为1024ms，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若1024ms内寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 1024ms. If the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 2, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the terminal group offset is determined. information is 1; or, if the number of times the terminal device is paged within 1024ms is 1, and the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, then the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability of the terminal equipment being paged or awakened within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, and referring to the above example, the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups , then it is determined that the terminal group offset information is 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, and the terminal equipment in terminal group 2 is adjusted to other terminal groups with reference to the above example group, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
或者，根据预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率以及终端群组个数的配置更新，确定终端群组偏移信息。作为一种示例，预设时长可以设置为2048ms，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为大于2/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为2，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1；或者，若2048ms内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率为小于1/3，寻呼终端设备的次数为1，且参考上述示例将终端群组2中的终端设备调整至其他终端群组，则确定终端群组偏移信息为1，等等。Alternatively, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period, the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset period of time, and the configuration update of the number of terminal groups. As an example, the preset duration can be set to 2048ms. If the probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within 2048ms is greater than 2/3, the number of times to page the terminal device is 2, and referring to the above example, set the terminal device in terminal group 2 If the terminal equipment is adjusted to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1; or, if the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within 2048ms is less than 1/3, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged is 1, And referring to the above example to adjust the terminal devices in the terminal group 2 to other terminal groups, the terminal group offset information is determined to be 1, and so on.
需说明的是，如上所述的预设时长、预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数、终端群组个数以及预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率中的任一数值，其实际大小均可以根据实际需求或历史经验进行设置，本申请不予限制。It should be noted that, any value in the preset duration, the number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration, the number of terminal groups, and the probability that the terminal equipment is paged or woken up within the preset duration is The actual size can be set according to actual needs or historical experience, which is not limited in this application.
可选地，目标终端群组是根据终端群组偏移信息确定的，可以包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group is determined according to terminal group offset information, and may include at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
以下以终端群组偏移信息为一数值，即偏移量为例解释如何根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组：The following takes the terminal group offset information as a value, that is, the offset, as an example to explain how to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to the preset policy:
第一种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：确定终端设备的标识信息与终端群组偏移信息之和为中间值，即UE_ID+PG_OFFSET，可选地，PG_OFFSET表示终端群组偏移信息；根据该中间值确定目标终端群组。In the first implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining that the sum of the identification information of the terminal equipment and the terminal group offset information is an intermediate value, That is, UE_ID+PG_OFFSET, optionally, PG_OFFSET represents terminal group offset information; the target terminal group is determined according to the intermediate value.
示例地，在相同寻呼范围内(可以是相同基站、相同AMF)存在四个终端设备，分别为：终端设备A1、终端设备B1、终端设备C1和终端设备D1。假设终端群组的分组方式为取mod 4，且PG_OFFSET皆为0，同时一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧仅存在1个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1，也就是四个终端设备皆在同一个寻呼时机“0”：For example, there are four terminal devices in the same paging range (which may be the same base station and the same AMF), namely: terminal device A1, terminal device B1, terminal device C1 and terminal device D1. It is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is mod 4, and PG_OFFSET is all 0, and there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period and only one paging occasion in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 1, that is, the four terminal devices are all at the same paging occasion "0":
终端设备A1的UE_ID为768，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“0”，归类在1st终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device A1 is 768, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "0", and it is classified in the 1st terminal group;
终端设备B1的UE_ID为25，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“1”，归类在2nd终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device B1 is 25, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "1", which is classified in the 2nd terminal group;
终端设备C1的UE_ID为710，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd 终端群组；The UE_ID of the terminal device C1 is 710, and after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", which is classified in the 3rd terminal group;
终端设备D1的UE_ID为2，代入(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4后，其值为“2”，归类在3rd终端群组。The UE_ID of the terminal device D1 is 2, after substituting (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4, its value is "2", and it is classified into the 3rd terminal group.
可选地，终端设备D1因为较频繁使用数据传输、后台数据间歇性传输、或是较频繁接收语音电话等，导致终端设备D1频繁的在连接态(RRC_CONNECTED)以及非激活态间切换，被寻呼的概率大为增加，因此，同属相同终端群组的终端C1也常跟着被唤醒信号指示(1st终端群组以及3rd终端群组)唤醒并监听物理下行控制信道以及可能的解析物理下行共享信道而导致耗电，即便终端设备C1不做无线资源控制状态切换，但因为被唤醒已经形成耗电。Optionally, the terminal device D1 frequently switches between the connected state (RRC_CONNECTED) and the inactive state due to the frequent use of data transmission, the intermittent transmission of background data, or the more frequent reception of voice calls, etc. The probability of calling is greatly increased. Therefore, the terminals C1 that belong to the same terminal group are often awakened by the wake-up signal (1st terminal group and 3rd terminal group) and monitor the physical downlink control channel and possibly analyze the physical downlink shared channel. This leads to power consumption. Even if the terminal device C1 does not perform radio resource control state switching, power consumption has already occurred due to being woken up.
考虑到终端设备A1被寻呼的概率相对终端设备B1及终端设备C1要高，终端设备A1较频繁的在连接态以及非激活态间切换，因此网络设备评估可以动态调整终端设备D1归属至1st终端群组，因此可以通过无线资源控制信令指示终端设备D1的PG_OFFSET＝2，也就是终端设备D1：(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod 4＝0，被归类至1st终端群组。Considering that the probability of terminal equipment A1 being paged is higher than that of terminal equipment B1 and terminal equipment C1, terminal equipment A1 frequently switches between the connected state and the inactive state, so the network equipment evaluation can dynamically adjust the attribution of terminal equipment D1 to 1st. Therefore, the terminal device D1 can be instructed by radio resource control signaling that PG_OFFSET=2, that is, the terminal device D1: (UE_ID+PG_OFFSET) mod 4=0, is classified into the 1st terminal group.
后续，网络设备则无需再唤醒3rd终端群组内的终端，因此终端设备C1可以持续保持睡眠，达到省电目的。Subsequently, the network device does not need to wake up the terminals in the 3rd terminal group, so the terminal device C1 can continue to sleep to save power.
或者，也可以通过相同方式，将被寻呼概率较低的终端设备归类在一起，仍参考上述示例，可以将终端设备C1移至2nd终端群组。Alternatively, in the same way, the terminal devices with low probability of being paged can also be grouped together. Still referring to the above example, the terminal device C1 can be moved to the 2nd terminal group.
第二种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端设备的标识信息计算得到初始终端群组；确定初始终端群组与终端群组偏移信息之和为目标终端群组，例如，G UE(UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET，可选地，G UE(UE_ID)表示初始终端群组。 In the second implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may specifically include: calculating and obtaining the initial terminal group according to the identification information of the terminal equipment; The sum of the terminal group offset information is the target terminal group, for example, G UE (UE_ID)+PG_OFFSET, optionally, G UE (UE_ID) represents the initial terminal group.
作为一种示例，G UE(UE_ID)＝UE_ID/N G，N G表示终端群组个数，可以是依据网络规划的。在不同终端群组的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调整其所在终端群组，调整后的终端群组即目标终端群组。例如，N G＝4：终端群组a(UE_ID：0～255)、终端群组b(UE_ID：256～511)、终端群组c(UE_ID：512～767)、终端群组d(UE_ID：768～1023)，归类在终端群组a的终端设备可以通过PG_OFFSET调至其他终端群组。 As an example, G UE (UE_ID)= UE_ID /NG , where NG represents the number of terminal groups, which may be based on network planning. Terminal devices in different terminal groups can adjust their terminal groups through PG_OFFSET, and the adjusted terminal group is the target terminal group. For example, N G =4: terminal group a (UE_ID: 0-255), terminal group b (UE_ID: 256-511), terminal group c (UE_ID: 512-767), terminal group d (UE_ID: 768 to 1023), the terminal equipment classified in terminal group a can be transferred to other terminal groups through PG_OFFSET.
作为另一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As another example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in one discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A(UE_ID：222)、终端设备B(UE_ID：322)、终端设备C(UE_ID：556)、终端设备D(UE_ID：668)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "0" are: terminal device A (UE_ID: 222), terminal device B (UE_ID: 322), terminal device C (UE_ID: 556), and terminal device D (UE_ID: 668).
在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E(UE_ID：111)、终端设备F(UE_ID：401)、终端设备G(UE_ID：607)、终端设备H(UE_ID：607)。The terminal devices at paging occasion "1" are: terminal device E (UE_ID: 111), terminal device F (UE_ID: 401), terminal device G (UE_ID: 607), and terminal device H (UE_ID: 607).
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A在1st终端群组，终端设备B在2nd终端群组，终端设备C和终端设备D在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A与终端设备C较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C调整至与终端设备A相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking paging occasion "0" as an example, terminal device A is in the 1st terminal group, terminal device B is in the 2nd terminal group, and terminal device C and terminal device D are in the 3rd terminal group. When terminal equipment A and terminal equipment C are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust terminal equipment C to the same "1st terminal group" as terminal equipment A by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of terminal equipment D. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第三种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组。In a third implementation manner, determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment may be specifically: determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal equipment currently belongs. terminal group.
作为一种示例，假设一个非连续接收周期仅存在一个寻呼帧(Paging Frame)以及1个寻呼帧存在2个寻呼时机。由上述可以知道寻呼时机索引计算公式i_s＝floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2，该情况下：As an example, it is assumed that there is only one paging frame (Paging Frame) in a discontinuous reception period, and there are two paging occasions in one paging frame. From the above, it can be known that the paging occasion index calculation formula i_s=floor(UE_ID/1)mod 2, in this case:
在寻呼时机“0”的终端设备有：终端设备A2、终端设备B2、终端设备C2、终端设备D2；在寻呼时机“1”的终端设备有：终端设备E2、终端设备F2、终端设备G2。The terminal equipments at paging occasion "0" are: terminal equipment A2, terminal equipment B2, terminal equipment C2, terminal equipment D2; the terminal equipments at paging occasion "1" are: terminal equipment E2, terminal equipment F2, terminal equipment G2.
以寻呼时机“0”为例，终端设备A2在1st终端群组，终端设备B2在2nd终端群组，终端设备C2和终端设备D2在3rd终端群组。当终端设备A2与终端设备C2较频繁被寻呼，网络设备可以通过“PG_OFFSET”的方式将终端设备C2调整至与终端设备A2相同的“1st终端群组”，如此可以减少终端设备D2被唤醒的概率。本例中，针对终端设备C2的PG_OFFSET具体可以是2个终端群组偏移(3rd终端群组->4th终端群组->1st终端群组)，使其归类至1st终端群组。Taking the paging occasion "0" as an example, the terminal device A2 is in the 1st terminal group, the terminal device B2 is in the 2nd terminal group, and the terminal device C2 and the terminal device D2 are in the 3rd terminal group. When the terminal equipment A2 and the terminal equipment C2 are frequently paged, the network equipment can adjust the terminal equipment C2 to the same "1st terminal group" as the terminal equipment A2 by means of "PG_OFFSET", which can reduce the wake-up of the terminal equipment D2. The probability. In this example, the PG_OFFSET for the terminal device C2 may specifically be two terminal group offsets (3rd terminal group->4th terminal group->1st terminal group), so that it is classified into the 1st terminal group.
第四种实现方式中，根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组，可以具体为：根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。可选地，用于分组的参数可以包括但不限于终端群组的个数。示例地，假设终端群组的分组方式为：PG_Group＝floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G，可选地，PG_Group表示目标终端群组；其余各符号的含义如前所述。 In a fourth implementation manner, the target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment, which may be specifically: according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping to determine the target terminal group. Optionally, the parameter for grouping may include but not limited to the number of terminal groups. For example, it is assumed that the grouping method of the terminal group is: PG_Group=floor(UE_ID+PG_OFFSET)mod N G , optionally, PG_Group represents the target terminal group; the meanings of other symbols are as described above.
可选地，在本申请任一实施例中，终端设备的标识信息可以是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识和/或国际移动用户识别码确定的。参考长期演进系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据国际移动用户识别码确定的；新无线系统中，终端设备的标识信息是根据5G服务临时移动用户标识确定的，但本申请实施例不以此为限制。Optionally, in any embodiment of the present application, the identification information of the terminal device may be determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity and/or international mobile subscriber identity. In the reference long-term evolution system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the International Mobile Subscriber Identity; in the new wireless system, the identification information of the terminal equipment is determined according to the 5G service temporary mobile user identification, but the embodiments of this application do not use this for restrictions.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
需要说明的是，上述任一实施例可以单独实施，也可以是上述各实施例中至少两个任意结合来实施，对此不做限定。It should be noted that, any of the foregoing embodiments may be implemented independently, or may be implemented by any combination of at least two of the foregoing embodiments, which is not limited.
可以理解的是，上述各个实施例中，由终端设备实现的操作和步骤也可以由可用于终端设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，本申请实施例对此不作限定。由网络设备实现的操作和步骤也可以由用于网络设备的部件(例如芯片或者电路)实现，本申请实施例对此不作限定。It can be understood that, in the foregoing embodiments, the operations and steps implemented by the terminal device may also be implemented by a component (for example, a chip or a circuit) usable in the terminal device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application. The operations and steps implemented by the network device may also be implemented by a component (for example, a chip or a circuit) used for the network device, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
图7为本申请一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图。如图7所示，本实施例的信息处理装置70包括：获取模块71和处理模块72。其中：FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 7 , the information processing apparatus 70 in this embodiment includes: an acquisition module 71 and a processing module 72 . in:
获取模块71，用于获取终端群组偏移信息，可选地，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；an obtaining module 71, configured to obtain terminal group offset information, optionally, the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
处理模块72，用于基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。The processing module 72 is configured to determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy based on the terminal group offset information.
本实施例的信息处理装置通过获取模块和处理模块可以实现如图3所示实施例中的方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。The information processing apparatus of this embodiment can implement the solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 through the acquisition module and the processing module, and the implementation principle and technical effect thereof are similar, and are not repeated here.
一种实现方式中，信息处理装置70可以是终端设备，也可以是终端设备的部件(例如，集成电路，芯片，等等)，或者可以是其他通信模块，用于实现上述任一实施例中对应于终端设备的操作。In an implementation manner, the information processing apparatus 70 may be a terminal device, may also be a component of the terminal device (for example, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.), or may be other communication modules for implementing any of the above embodiments. Corresponds to the operation of the terminal device.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据与终端设备有关的通信行为确定的。Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，处理模块具体用于以下至少一种：Optionally, the processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理装置还可以包括：接收模块(未示出)，用于接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing apparatus may further include: a receiving module (not shown) configured to receive the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
图8为本申请另一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图。如图8所示，本实施例的信息处理装置80包括：接收模块81、确认模块82和处理模块83。其中：FIG. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus provided by another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 8 , the information processing apparatus 80 in this embodiment includes: a receiving module 81 , a confirming module 82 and a processing module 83 . in:
接收模块81，用于接收目标信息，目标信息携带有终端群组的指示信息；a receiving module 81, configured to receive target information, where the target information carries indication information of the terminal group;
确认模块82，用于确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；若是，则触发处理模块83基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。A confirmation module 82, configured to confirm whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs ; if yes, trigger the processing module 83 to perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group.
本实施例的信息处理装置通过接收模块、确认模块和处理模块可以实现如图5所示实施例中的方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。The information processing apparatus in this embodiment can implement the solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5 through the receiving module, the confirmation module and the processing module, and the implementation principle and technical effect are similar, and are not repeated here.
一种实现方式中，信息处理装置80可以是终端设备，也可以是终端设备的部件(例如，集成电路，芯片，等等)，或者可以是其他通信模块，用于实现上述任一实施例中对应于终端设备的操作。In an implementation manner, the information processing apparatus 80 may be a terminal device, or may be a component of the terminal device (eg, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.), or may be other communication modules, which are used to implement any of the foregoing embodiments. Corresponds to the operation of the terminal device.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following:
唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
寻呼指示。paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，处理模块具体用于以下至少一种：Optionally, the processing module is specifically used for at least one of the following:
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，监听物理下行控制信道；Monitor the physical downlink control channel according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，接收短消息；Receive short messages according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
依据寻呼指示所指示的终端群组信息，解析物理下行共享信道。The physical downlink shared channel is parsed according to the terminal group information indicated by the paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，目标终端群组信息基于终端群组偏移信息确定，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，接收模块81还可以用于：接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the receiving module 81 may be further configured to: receive the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
图9为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图。如图9所示，本实施例的信息处理装置900包括：判断模块901和处理模块902。其中：FIG. 9 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 9 , the information processing apparatus 900 of this embodiment includes: a judgment module 901 and a processing module 902 . in:
判断模块901，用于判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；若是，触发处理模块902根据预设参数确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组。The judgment module 901 is used to judge whether the preset parameters of the terminal equipment meet the preset conditions; if so, the trigger processing module 902 determines the terminal group offset information of the terminal equipment according to the preset parameters, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group offset information. The terminal group to which the device belongs.
本实施例的信息处理装置通过判断模块和处理模块可以实现如图4所示实施例中的方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。The information processing apparatus of this embodiment can implement the solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4 through the judgment module and the processing module, and the implementation principle and technical effect thereof are similar, and will not be repeated here.
一种实现方式中，信息处理装置900可以是网络设备，也可以是网络设备的部件(例如，集成电路，芯片，等等)，或者可以是其他通信模块，用于实现上述任一实施例中对应于网络设备的操作。In an implementation manner, the information processing apparatus 900 may be a network device, may also be a component of a network device (eg, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.), or may be other communication modules for implementing any of the above embodiments. Corresponds to the operation of the network device.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
可选地，预设条件可以为至少一预设参数的值大于某一固定值(可以为预设阈值，或者，动态确定或生成的值)，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，可认为预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，可认为预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the value of at least one preset parameter is greater than a certain fixed value (it may be a preset threshold value, or a dynamically determined or generated value). If the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it may be It is considered that the preset parameter meets the preset condition; and/or, if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, the preset parameter may be deemed to not meet the preset condition.
可选地，预设参数是与终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数。Optionally, the preset parameter is a parameter related to the communication behavior related to the terminal device.
可选地，通信行为包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the communication behavior includes at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，信息处理装置还包括：第一发送模块(未示出)，用于在确定终端设备的终端群组偏移信息之后，发送终端群组偏移信息。Optionally, the information processing apparatus further includes: a first sending module (not shown), configured to send the terminal group offset information after determining the terminal group offset information of the terminal device.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes configuration update command or registration accept signaling.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，信息处理装置还可以包括：第二发送模块(未示出)，用于发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the information processing apparatus may further include: a second sending module (not shown), configured to send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
图10为本申请又一实施例提供的信息处理装置的结构示意图。如图10所示，本实施例的信息处理装置100包括：判断模块101、发送模块102和处理模块103。其中：FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of an information processing apparatus according to another embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 10 , the information processing apparatus 100 of this embodiment includes: a judgment module 101 , a sending module 102 and a processing module 103 . in:
判断模块101，用于判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；若是，触发发送模块102发送目标信息，目标信息携带有所述终端设备所属的终端群组的指示信息；以及，触发处理模块103执行以下操作：The judgment module 101 is used to judge whether the preset parameters of the terminal equipment meet the preset conditions; if so, trigger the sending module 102 to send target information, and the target information carries the indication information of the terminal group to which the terminal equipment belongs; and, trigger processing Module 103 performs the following operations:
确认终端群组是否为目标终端群组，可选地，目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，终端群组偏移信息用于调整终端设备所属的终端群组；Confirming whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, optionally, the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
若是，则基于目标终端群组进行相应处理。If so, corresponding processing is performed based on the target terminal group.
本实施例的信息处理装置通过判断模块、发送模块和处理模块可以实现如图6所示实施例中的方案，其实现原理和技术效果类似，此处不再赘述。The information processing apparatus of this embodiment can implement the solution in the embodiment shown in FIG. 6 through the judging module, the sending module, and the processing module. The implementation principle and technical effect are similar, and details are not repeated here.
一种实现方式中，信息处理装置100可以是网络设备，也可以是网络设备的部件(例如，集成电路，芯片，等等)，或者可以是其他通信模块，用于实现上述任一实施例中对应于网络设备的操作。In an implementation manner, the information processing apparatus 100 may be a network device, may also be a component of a network device (eg, an integrated circuit, a chip, etc.), or may be other communication modules for implementing any of the foregoing embodiments. Corresponds to the operation of the network device.
可选地，所述预设参数是与所述终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数。Optionally, the preset parameter is a parameter related to the communication behavior of the terminal device.
可选地，预设条件可以为终端设备为R17以后的终端设备，当网络设备判断寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R17(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若寻呼的目标终端设备的预设参数为R16(含)以后的终端设备的预设参数，则确定终端设备的预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the terminal device is a terminal device after R17, and when the network device determines that the preset parameter of the paging target terminal device is the preset parameter of the terminal device after R17 (inclusive), then determine the terminal device. and/or, if the preset parameters of the paging target terminal equipment are the preset parameters of the terminal equipment after R16 (inclusive), it is determined that the preset parameters of the terminal equipment do not meet the preset conditions condition.
可选地，预设条件可以为至少一预设参数的值大于某一固定值(可以为预设阈值，或者，动态确定或生成的值)，若预设参数的值大于该固定值，可认为预设参数符合预设条件；和/或，若预设参数的值小于或等于该固定值，可认为预设参数不符合预设条件。Optionally, the preset condition may be that the value of at least one preset parameter is greater than a certain fixed value (it may be a preset threshold value, or a dynamically determined or generated value). If the value of the preset parameter is greater than the fixed value, it may be It is considered that the preset parameter meets the preset condition; and/or, if the value of the preset parameter is less than or equal to the fixed value, the preset parameter may be deemed to not meet the preset condition.
可选地，目标信息包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target information includes at least one of the following:
唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
寻呼指示。paging indication.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
可选地，无线资源控制信令包括以下至少一种：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令。Optionally, the radio resource control signaling includes at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling, or radio resource control recovery signaling.
可选地，非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。Optionally, the non-access stratum signaling includes: a configuration update command or a registration acceptance signaling.
可选地，处理模块可以具体用于以下至少一种：Optionally, the processing module can be specifically used for at least one of the following:
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送包含寻呼无线网络临时标识的信息；Based on the target terminal group, send information including the temporary identity of the paging wireless network through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送短信息；Based on the target terminal group, send short messages through the physical downlink control channel;
基于目标终端群组，通过物理共享控制信道发送寻呼消息。Based on the target terminal group, the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
可选地，终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
可选地，目标终端群组信息是基于终端群组偏移信息确定的，包括以下至少一种：Optionally, the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备的标识信息，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal equipment;
根据终端群组偏移信息及终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定目标终端群组；Determine the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
根据终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
可选地，终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：Optionally, the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
可选地，终端群组(包含目标终端群组)内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同。Optionally, the paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group (including the target terminal group) are the same.
可选地，终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态。Optionally, the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state.
可选地，发送模块还可以用于：发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Optionally, the sending module may also be used to: send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
图11为本申请一实施例提供的通信设备的结构示意图。如图11所示，本实施例所述的通信设备20可以是前述方法实施例中提到的终端设备(或者可用于终端设备的部件)或者网络设备(或者可用于网络设备的部件)。通信设备20可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的对应于终端设备或者网络设备的方法，具体参见上述方法实施例中的说明。FIG. 11 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 11 , the communication device 20 in this embodiment may be a terminal device (or a component usable for a terminal device) or a network device (or a component usable for a network device) mentioned in the foregoing method embodiments. The communication device 20 may be configured to implement the method described in the foregoing method embodiments and corresponding to the terminal device or the network device. For details, refer to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
通信设备20可以包括一个或多个处理器21，该处理器21也可以称为处理单元，可以实现一定的控制或者处理功能。处理器21可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如可以是基带处理器、或中央处理器。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，中央处理器可以用于对通信设备进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。The communication device 20 may include one or more processors 21, and the processors 21 may also be referred to as processing units, which may implement certain control or processing functions. The processor 21 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor or the like. For example, it may be a baseband processor, or a central processing unit. The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, and the central processing unit can be used to control the communication equipment, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs.
可选地，处理器21也可以存有指令23或者数据(例如中间数据)。可选地，指令23可以被处理器21运行，使得通信设备20执行上述方法实施例中描述的对应于终端设备或者网络设备的方法。Optionally, the processor 21 may also store instructions 23 or data (eg, intermediate data). Optionally, the instructions 23 may be executed by the processor 21, so that the communication device 20 executes the method described in the above method embodiments corresponding to the terminal device or the network device.
可选地，通信设备20可以包括电路，该电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。Optionally, the communication device 20 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the function of sending or receiving or communicating in the foregoing method embodiments.
可选地，通信设备20中可以包括一个或多个存储器22，其上可以存有指令24，该指令可在处理器21上被运行，使得通信设备20执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。Optionally, the communication device 20 may include one or more memories 22 on which instructions 24 may be stored, and the instructions may be executed on the processor 21, so that the communication device 20 executes the methods described in the above method embodiments.
可选地，存储器22中也可以是存储有数据。处理器21和存储器22可以单独设置，也可以集成在一起。Optionally, the memory 22 may also store data. The processor 21 and the memory 22 can be provided separately or integrated together.
可选地，通信设备20还可以包括收发器25和/或天线26。处理器21可以称为处理单元，对通信设备20(终端设备或核心网设备或者无线接入网设备)进行控制。收发器25可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路、或者收发器等，用于实现通信设备20的收发功能。Optionally, the communication device 20 may also include a transceiver 25 and/or an antenna 26 . The processor 21 may be referred to as a processing unit, and controls the communication device 20 (terminal device or core network device or radio access network device). The transceiver 25 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, a transceiver circuit, or a transceiver, etc., and is used to implement the transceiver function of the communication device 20 .
可选地，若该通信设备20用于实现对应于上述各实施例中终端设备的操作时，例如，可以由收发器25获取终端群组偏移信息，并由处理器21基于终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定终端设备所属的目标终端群组。Optionally, if the communication device 20 is used to implement operations corresponding to the terminal devices in the above embodiments, for example, the transceiver 25 may acquire the terminal group offset information, and the processor 21 may obtain the terminal group offset information based on the terminal group offset. move information, and determine the target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs according to a preset policy.
可选地，处理器21和收发器25的具体实现过程可以参见上述各实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。Optionally, for the specific implementation process of the processor 21 and the transceiver 25, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
可选地，若该通信设备20用于实现对应于上述各实施例中网络设备的操作时，例如，可以由处理器21判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件，并在预设参数符合预设条件时，根据预设参数确定该终端设备的终端群组偏移信息。Optionally, if the communication device 20 is used to implement operations corresponding to the network devices in the above embodiments, for example, the processor 21 may determine whether the preset parameters of the terminal device meet the preset conditions, and determine whether the preset parameters meet the preset conditions. When the preset conditions are met, the terminal group offset information of the terminal device is determined according to the preset parameters.
可选地，处理器21和收发器25的具体实现过程可以参见上述各实施例的相关描述，此处不再赘述。Optionally, for the specific implementation process of the processor 21 and the transceiver 25, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
本申请中描述的处理器21和收发器25可实现在IC(Integrated Circuit，集成电路)、模拟集成电路、RFIC(Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit，射频集成电路)、混合信号集成电路、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，专用集成电路)、PCB(Printed Circuit Board，印刷电路板)、电子设备等上。该处理器21和收发器25也可以用各种集成电路工艺技术来制造，例如CMOS(Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor，互补金属氧化物半导体)、NMOS(N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor，N型金属氧化物半导体)、PMOS(Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor，P型金属氧化物半导体)、BJT(Bipolar Junction Transistor，双极结型晶体管)、双极CMOS(BiCMOS)、硅锗(SiGe)、砷化镓(GaAs)等。The processor 21 and the transceiver 25 described in this application can be implemented in IC (Integrated Circuit, integrated circuit), analog integrated circuit, RFIC (Radio Frequency Integrated Circuit, radio frequency integrated circuit), mixed-signal integrated circuit, ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit) Circuit, application-specific integrated circuit), PCB (Printed Circuit Board, printed circuit board), electronic equipment, etc. The processor 21 and the transceiver 25 can also be fabricated by various integrated circuit technology, such as CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), NMOS (N Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor, N-type Metal Oxide Semiconductor) ), PMOS (Positive channel Metal Oxide Semiconductor, P-type metal oxide semiconductor), BJT (Bipolar Junction Transistor, bipolar junction transistor), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs) Wait.
虽然在以上的实施例描述中，通信设备以终端设备或者网络设备为例来描述，但本申请中描述的通信设备的范围并不限于上述终端设备或网络设备，而且通信设备的结构可以不受图11的限制。通信设备可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。Although in the description of the above embodiments, the communication device is described by taking a terminal device or a network device as an example, the scope of the communication device described in this application is not limited to the above-mentioned terminal device or network device, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by Figure 11 Restrictions. The communication device may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device.
本申请实施例还提供一种通信系统，包括：如上任一方法实施例中的终端设备；如上任一方法实施例中的网络设备。An embodiment of the present application further provides a communication system, including: a terminal device as in any of the above method embodiments; and a network device as in any of the above method embodiments.
本申请还提供一种通信设备，所述设备包括：存储器、处理器及存储在所述存储器上并可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序，所述计算机程序被所述处理器执行时实现如上所述的方法的步骤。The present application also provides a communication device, the device includes: a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored on the memory and executable on the processor, the computer program being implemented when executed by the processor The steps of the method as described above.
本申请实施例还提供一种可读存储介质，可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序，计算机程序被执行时实现如上所述的方法。Embodiments of the present application further provide a readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored on the readable storage medium, and the above method is implemented when the computer program is executed.
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序代码，当计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行如上各种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, the computer program product includes computer program code, when the computer program code is run on a computer, the computer program code causes the computer to execute the method described in the various possible implementation manners above.
本申请实施例还提供一种芯片，包括存储器和处理器，存储器用于存储计算机程序，处理器用于从存储器中调用并运行所述计算机程序，使得安装有该芯片的设备执行如上各种可能的实施方式中所述的方法。An embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, including a memory and a processor, the memory is used for storing a computer program, and the processor is used for calling and running the computer program from the memory, so that a device installed with the chip can perform various possible operations as described above. The method described in the embodiments.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的设备和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的设备实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述模块的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个模块可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或模块的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and method may be implemented in other manners. For example, the device embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of the modules is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple modules may be combined or integrated. to another system, or some features can be ignored, or not implemented. On the other hand, the shown or discussed mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or modules, and may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的模块可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为模块显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部模块来实现本实施例方案的目的。The modules described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as modules may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the modules may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution in this embodiment.
可选地，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能模块可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个模块单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上模块集成在一个单元中。上述模块成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用硬件加软件功能单元的形式实现。Optionally, each functional module in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated in one processing unit, or each module may exist physically alone, or two or more modules may be integrated in one unit. The units formed by the above modules can be implemented in the form of hardware, or can be implemented in the form of hardware plus software functional units.
上述以软件功能模块的形式实现的集成的模块，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。上述软件功能模块存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)或处理器(英文：processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的部分步骤。The above-mentioned integrated modules implemented in the form of software functional modules may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. The above-mentioned software function modules are stored in a storage medium, and include several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (English: processor) to execute the various embodiments of the present application. part of the method.
上述存储介质可以是由任何类型的易失性或非易失性存储设备或者它们的组合实现，如静态随机存取存储器(SRAM)，电可擦除可编程只读存储器(EEPROM)，可擦除可编程只读存储器(EPROM)，可编程只读存储器(PROM)，只读存储器(ROM)，磁存储器，快闪存储器，磁盘或光盘。存储介质可以是通用或专用计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。The above-mentioned storage medium may be implemented by any type of volatile or non-volatile storage device or a combination thereof, such as static random access memory (SRAM), electrically erasable programmable read only memory (EEPROM), erasable Except programmable read only memory (EPROM), programmable read only memory (PROM), read only memory (ROM), magnetic memory, flash memory, magnetic disk or optical disk. A storage medium can be any available medium that can be accessed by a general purpose or special purpose computer.
一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuits，专用集成电路)中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于设备中。An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor, such that the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and the storage medium may be located in an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuits, application specific integrated circuit). Of course, the processor and storage medium may also exist in the device as discrete components.
需要说明的是，在本文中，术语“包括”、“包含”或者其任何其他变体意在涵盖非排他性的包含，从而使得包括一系列要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置不仅包括那些要素，而且还包括没有明确列出的其他要素，或者是还包括为这种过程、方法、物品或者装置所固有的要素。在没有更多限制的情况下，由语句“包括一个……”限定的要素，并不排除在包括该要素的过程、方法、物品或者装置中还存在另外的相同要素，此外，本申请不同实施例中具有同样命名的部件、特征、要素可能具有相同含义，也可能具有不同含义，其具体含义需以其在该具体实施例中的解释或者进一步结合该具体实施例中上下文进行确定。It should be noted that, herein, the terms "comprising", "comprising" or any other variation thereof are intended to encompass non-exclusive inclusion, such that a process, method, article or device comprising a series of elements includes not only those elements, It also includes other elements not expressly listed or inherent to such a process, method, article or apparatus. Without further limitation, an element defined by the phrase "comprises a..." does not preclude the presence of additional identical elements in the process, method, article, or device that includes the element, and further, different implementations of the present application Components, features and elements with the same names in the examples may have the same meaning or may have different meanings, and their specific meanings need to be determined by their explanations in this specific embodiment or further combined with the context in this specific embodiment.
应当理解，尽管在本文可能采用术语第一、第二、第三等来描述各种信息，但这些信息不应限于这些术语。这些术语仅用来将同一类型的信息彼此区分开。例如，在不脱离本文范围的情况下，第一信息也可以被称为第二信息，类似地，第二信息也可以被称为第一信息。取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语“如果”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”。再者，如同在本文中所使用的，单数形式“一”、“一个”和“该”旨在也包括复数形式，除非上下文中有相反的指示。应当进一步理解，术语“包含”、“包括”表明存在所述的特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组，但不排除一个或多个其他特征、步骤、操作、元件、组件、项目、种类、和/或组的存在、出现或添加。本申请使用的术语“或”、“和/或”、“包括以下至少一个”等可被解释为包括性的，或意味着任一个或任何组合。例如，“包括以下至少一个：A、B、C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”，再如，“A、B或C”或者“A、B和/或C”意味着“以下任一个：A；B；C；A和B；A和C；B和C；A和B和C”。仅当元件、功能、步骤或操作的组合在某些方式下内在地互相排斥时，才会出现该定义的例外。It should be understood that although the terms first, second, third, etc. may be used herein to describe various information, such information should not be limited by these terms. These terms are only used to distinguish the same type of information from each other. For example, first information may also be referred to as second information, and similarly, second information may also be referred to as first information, without departing from the scope of this document. Depending on the context, the word "if" as used herein can be interpreted as "at the time of" or "when" or "in response to determining." Also, as used herein, the singular forms "a," "an," and "the" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context dictates otherwise. It should be further understood that the terms "comprising", "comprising" indicate the presence of stated features, steps, operations, elements, components, items, kinds, and/or groups, but do not exclude one or more other features, steps, operations, The existence, appearance or addition of elements, assemblies, items, categories, and/or groups. As used herein, the terms "or", "and/or", "including at least one of the following" and the like may be construed to be inclusive or to mean any one or any combination. For example, "comprising at least one of the following: A, B, C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C", for example, " A, B or C" or "A, B and/or C" means "any of the following: A; B; C; A and B; A and C; B and C; A and B and C". Exceptions to this definition arise only when combinations of elements, functions, steps, or operations are inherently mutually exclusive in some way.
应该理解的是，虽然本申请实施例中的流程图中的各个步骤按照箭头的指示依次显示，但是这些步骤并不是必然按照箭头指示的顺序依次执行。除非本文中有明确的说明，这些步骤的执行并没有严格的顺序限制，其可以以其他的顺序执行。而且，图中的至少一部分步骤可以包括多个子步骤或者多个阶段，这些子步骤或者阶段并不必然是在同一时刻执行完成，而是可以在不同的时刻执行，其执行顺序也不必然是依次进行，而是可以与其他步骤或者其他步骤的子步骤或者阶段的至少一部分轮流或者交替地执行。It should be understood that, although the steps in the flowcharts in the embodiments of the present application are displayed in sequence according to the arrows, these steps are not necessarily executed in the sequence indicated by the arrows. Unless explicitly stated herein, the execution of these steps is not strictly limited to the order and may be performed in other orders. Moreover, at least a part of the steps in the figure may include multiple sub-steps or multiple stages. These sub-steps or stages are not necessarily executed at the same time, but may be executed at different times, and the execution order is not necessarily sequential. Instead, it may be performed in turn or alternately with other steps or at least a portion of sub-steps or stages of other steps.
取决于语境，如在此所使用的词语“如果”、“若”可以被解释成为“在……时”或“当……时”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测”。类似地，取决于语境，短语“如果确定”或“如果检测(陈述的条件或事件)”可以被解释成为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测(陈述的条件或事件)时”或“响应于检测(陈述的条件或事件)”。Depending on the context, the words "if", "if" as used herein may be interpreted as "at" or "when" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting". Similarly, the phrases "if determined" or "if detected (the stated condition or event)" can be interpreted as "when determined" or "in response to determining" or "when detected (the stated condition or event)," depending on the context )" or "in response to detection (a stated condition or event)".
需要说明的是，在本文中，采用了诸如S301、S302等步骤代号，其目的是为了更清楚简要地表述相应内容，不构成顺序上的实质性限制，本领域技术人员在具体实施时，可能会先执行S302后执行S301等，但这些均应在本申请的保护范围之内。It should be noted that, in this article, step codes such as S301 and S302 are used, the purpose of which is to express the corresponding content more clearly and briefly, and does not constitute a substantial restriction on the sequence. Those skilled in the art may S302 will be executed first and then S301, etc., but these should all fall within the protection scope of this application.
应当理解，此处所描述的具体实施例仅仅用以解释本申请，并不用于限定本申请。It should be understood that the specific embodiments described herein are only used to explain the present application, but not to limit the present application.
在后续的描述中，使用用于表示元件的诸如“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”的后缀仅为了有利于本申请的说明，其本身没有特定的意义。因此，“模块”、“部件”或者“单元”可以混合地使用。In the following description, suffixes such as "module", "component" or "unit" used to represent elements are used only to facilitate the description of the present application, and have no specific meaning per se. Thus, "module", "component" or "unit" may be used interchangeably.
终端设备可以以各种形式来实施。例如，本申请中描述的终端设备可以包括诸如手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、个人数字助理(Personal Digital Assistant，PDA)、便捷式媒体播放器(Portable Media Player，PMP)、导航装置、可穿戴设备、智能手环、计步器等移动终端，以及诸如数字TV、台式计算机等固定终端。Terminal devices can be implemented in various forms. For example, the terminal equipment described in this application may include mobile phones, tablet computers, notebook computers, palmtop computers, personal digital assistants (Personal Digital Assistant, PDA), portable media players (Portable Media Player, PMP), navigation devices, Mobile terminals such as wearable devices, smart bracelets, and pedometers, as well as stationary terminals such as digital TVs and desktop computers.
本文描述中将以移动终端为例进行说明，本领域技术人员将理解的是，除了特别用于移动目的的 元件之外，根据本申请的实施方式的构造也能够应用于固定类型的终端。In the description herein, a mobile terminal will be used as an example, and those skilled in the art will understand that, in addition to elements particularly used for mobile purposes, the configurations according to the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to stationary type terminals.
请参阅图12，其为实现本申请各个实施例的一种移动终端的硬件结构示意图，该移动终端90可以包括：RF(Radio Frequency，射频)单元91、WiFi模块92、音频输出单元93、A/V(音频/视频)输入单元94、传感器95、显示单元96、用户输入单元97、接口单元98、存储器99、处理器100、以及电源101等部件。本领域技术人员可以理解，图12中示出的移动终端结构并不构成对移动终端的限定，移动终端可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件，或者组合某些部件，或者不同的部件布置。Please refer to FIG. 12 , which is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a mobile terminal implementing various embodiments of the present application. The mobile terminal 90 may include: an RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) unit 91 , a WiFi module 92 , an audio output unit 93 , A /V (audio/video) input unit 94, sensor 95, display unit 96, user input unit 97, interface unit 98, memory 99, processor 100, and power supply 101 and other components. Those skilled in the art can understand that the structure of the mobile terminal shown in FIG. 12 does not constitute a limitation on the mobile terminal, and the mobile terminal may include more or less components than the one shown, or combine some components, or different components layout.
下面结合图12对移动终端的各个部件进行具体的介绍：Below in conjunction with Fig. 12, each component of the mobile terminal is specifically introduced:
射频单元91可用于收发信息或通话过程中，信号的接收和发送，具体的，将基站的下行信息接收后，给处理器100处理；可选地，将上行的数据发送给基站。通常，射频单元91包括但不限于天线、至少一个放大器、收发信机、耦合器、低噪声放大器、双工器等。此外，射频单元91还可以通过无线通信与网络和其他设备通信。上述无线通信可以使用任一通信标准或协议，包括但不限于GSM(Global System of Mobile communication，全球移动通讯系统)、GPRS(General Packet Radio Service，通用分组无线服务)、CDMA2000(Code Division Multiple Access 2000，码分多址2000)、WCDMA(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,宽带码分多址)、TD-SCDMA(Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access，时分同步码分多址)、FDD-LTE(Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，频分双工长期演进)和TDD-LTE(Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution，分时双工长期演进)等。The radio frequency unit 91 can be used for receiving and sending signals during sending and receiving of information or during a call. Specifically, after receiving the downlink information of the base station, it is processed by the processor 100; optionally, the uplink data is sent to the base station. Typically, the radio frequency unit 91 includes, but is not limited to, an antenna, at least one amplifier, a transceiver, a coupler, a low noise amplifier, a duplexer, and the like. In addition, the radio frequency unit 91 can also communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication. The above-mentioned wireless communication can use any communication standard or protocol, including but not limited to GSM (Global System of Mobile communication, Global System for Mobile Communication), GPRS (General Packet Radio Service, General Packet Radio Service), CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access 2000 , Code Division Multiple Access 2000), WCDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access), TD-SCDMA (Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access, Time Division Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access), FDD-LTE (Frequency Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, frequency division duplexing long term evolution) and TDD-LTE (Time Division Duplexing-Long Term Evolution, time division duplexing long term evolution) and so on.
WiFi属于短距离无线传输技术，移动终端通过WiFi模块92可以帮助用户收发电子邮件、浏览网页和访问流式媒体等，它为用户提供了无线的宽带互联网访问。虽然图12示出了WiFi模块92，但是可以理解的是，其并不属于移动终端的必须构成，完全可以根据需要在不改变发明的本质的范围内而省略。WiFi is a short-distance wireless transmission technology, and the mobile terminal can help users to send and receive emails, browse web pages, and access streaming media through the WiFi module 92, which provides users with wireless broadband Internet access. Although FIG. 12 shows the WiFi module 92, it can be understood that it is not a necessary component of the mobile terminal, and can be completely omitted as required within the scope of not changing the essence of the invention.
音频输出单元93可以在移动终端90处于呼叫信号接收模式、通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式、广播接收模式等等模式下时，将射频单元91或WiFi模块92接收的或者在存储器99中存储的音频数据转换成音频信号并且输出为声音。而且，音频输出单元93还可以提供与移动终端90执行的特定功能相关的音频输出(例如，呼叫信号接收声音、消息接收声音等等)。音频输出单元93可以包括扬声器、蜂鸣器等等。The audio output unit 93 can store the data received by the radio frequency unit 91 or the WiFi module 92 or stored in the memory 99 when the mobile terminal 90 is in a call signal receiving mode, a talking mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, a broadcast receiving mode, etc. The audio data is converted into audio signal and output as sound. Also, the audio output unit 93 may also provide audio output related to a specific function performed by the mobile terminal 90 (eg, call signal reception sound, message reception sound, etc.). The audio output unit 93 may include a speaker, a buzzer, and the like.
A/V输入单元94用于接收音频或视频信号。A/V输入单元94可以包括GPU(Graphics Processing Unit，图形处理器)941和麦克风942，图形处理器941对在视频捕获模式或图像捕获模式中由图像捕获装置(如摄像头)获得的静态图片或视频的图像数据进行处理。处理后的图像帧可以显示在显示单元96上。经图形处理器941处理后的图像帧可以存储在存储器99(或其它存储介质)中或者经由射频单元91或WiFi模块92进行发送。麦克风942可以在电话通话模式、记录模式、语音识别模式等等运行模式中经由麦克风942接收声音(音频数据)，并且能够将这样的声音处理为音频数据。处理后的音频(语音)数据可以在电话通话模式的情况下转换为可经由射频单元91发送到移动通信基站的格式输出。麦克风942可以实施各种类型的噪声消除(或抑制)算法以消除(或抑制)在接收和发送音频信号的过程中产生的噪声或者干扰。The A/V input unit 94 is used to receive audio or video signals. The A/V input unit 94 may include a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit, graphics processor) 941 and a microphone 942, and the graphics processor 941 is used for still pictures or images obtained by an image capture device (such as a camera) in a video capture mode or an image capture mode. The image data of the video is processed. The processed image frames may be displayed on the display unit 96 . The image frames processed by the graphics processor 941 may be stored in the memory 99 (or other storage medium) or transmitted via the radio frequency unit 91 or the WiFi module 92 . The microphone 942 can receive sound (audio data) via the microphone 942 in a telephone call mode, a recording mode, a voice recognition mode, etc., and can process such sound as audio data. The processed audio (voice) data can be converted into a format that can be transmitted to a mobile communication base station via the radio frequency unit 91 for output in the case of a telephone conversation mode. The microphone 942 may implement various types of noise cancellation (or suppression) algorithms to remove (or suppress) noise or interference generated in the process of receiving and transmitting audio signals.
移动终端90还包括至少一种传感器95，比如光传感器、运动传感器以及其他传感器。可选地，光传感器包括环境光传感器及接近传感器，可选地，环境光传感器可根据环境光线的明暗来调节显示面板961的亮度，接近传感器可在移动终端90移动到耳边时，关闭显示面板961和/或背光。作为运动传感器的一种，加速计传感器可检测各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小，静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向，可用于识别手机姿态的应用(比如横竖屏切换、相关游戏、磁力计姿态校准)、振动识别相关功能(比如计步器、敲击)等；至于手机还可配置的指纹传感器、压力传感器、虹膜传感器、分子传感器、陀螺仪、气压计、湿度计、温度计、红外线传感器等其他传感器，在此不再赘述。The mobile terminal 90 also includes at least one type of sensor 95, such as a light sensor, a motion sensor, and other sensors. Optionally, the light sensor includes an ambient light sensor and a proximity sensor. Optionally, the ambient light sensor can adjust the brightness of the display panel 961 according to the brightness of the ambient light, and the proximity sensor can turn off the display when the mobile terminal 90 is moved to the ear. Panel 961 and/or backlight. As a kind of motion sensor, the accelerometer sensor can detect the magnitude of acceleration in all directions (usually three axes), and can detect the magnitude and direction of gravity when it is stationary. games, magnetometer attitude calibration), vibration recognition related functions (such as pedometer, tapping), etc.; as for the fingerprint sensor, pressure sensor, iris sensor, molecular sensor, gyroscope, barometer, hygrometer, etc. Other sensors such as thermometers, infrared sensors, etc. will not be repeated here.
显示单元96用于显示由用户输入的信息或提供给用户的信息。显示单元96可包括显示面板961，可以采用LCD(Liquid Crystal Display，液晶显示器)、OLED(Organic Light-Emitting Diode，有机发光二极管)等形式来配置显示面板961。The display unit 96 is used to display information input by the user or information provided to the user. The display unit 96 may include a display panel 961, and the display panel 961 may be configured in the form of an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display, liquid crystal display), an OLED (Organic Light-Emitting Diode, organic light-emitting diode), and the like.
用户输入单元97可用于接收输入的数字或字符信息，以及产生与移动终端的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。可选地，用户输入单元97可包括触控面板971以及其他输入设备972。触控面板971，也称为触摸屏，可收集用户在其上或附近的触摸操作(比如用户使用手指、触笔等任何适合的物体或附件在触控面板971上或在触控面板971附近的操作)，并根据预先设定的程式驱动相应的连接装置。触控面板971可包括触摸检测装置和触摸控制器两个部分。可选地，触摸检测装置检测用户的触摸方位，并检测触摸操作带来的信号，将信号传送给触摸控制器；触摸控制器从触摸检测装置上接收触摸信息，并将它转换成触点坐标，再送给处理器100，并能接收处理器100发来的命令并加以执行。此外，可以采用电阻式、电容式、红外线以及表面声波等多种类型实现触控面板971。除了触控面板971，用户输入单元97还可以包括其他输入设备972。可选地，其他输入设备972可以包括但不限 于物理键盘、功能键(比如音量控制按键、开关按键等)、轨迹球、鼠标、操作杆等中的一种或多种，具体此处不做限定。The user input unit 97 may be used to receive input numerical or character information, and generate key signal input related to user settings and function control of the mobile terminal. Optionally, the user input unit 97 may include a touch panel 971 and other input devices 972 . The touch panel 971, also known as a touch screen, can collect touch operations by the user on or near it (such as the user's finger, stylus, etc., any suitable object or accessory on or near the touch panel 971). operation), and drive the corresponding connection device according to the preset program. The touch panel 971 may include two parts, a touch detection device and a touch controller. Optionally, the touch detection device detects the touch orientation of the user, detects the signal brought by the touch operation, and transmits the signal to the touch controller; the touch controller receives the touch information from the touch detection device and converts it into contact coordinates , and then send it to the processor 100, and can receive the command sent by the processor 100 and execute it. In addition, the touch panel 971 can be implemented in various types such as resistive, capacitive, infrared, and surface acoustic waves. In addition to the touch panel 971 , the user input unit 97 may also include other input devices 972 . Optionally, other input devices 972 may include but are not limited to one or more of physical keyboards, function keys (such as volume control keys, switch keys, etc.), trackballs, mice, operation sticks, etc., which are not specifically described here. limited.
可选地，触控面板971可覆盖显示面板961，当触控面板971检测到在其上或附近的触摸操作后，传送给处理器100以确定触摸事件的类型，随后处理器100根据触摸事件的类型在显示面板961上提供相应的视觉输出。虽然在图12中，触控面板971与显示面板961是作为两个独立的部件来实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，但是在某些实施例中，可以将触控面板971与显示面板961集成而实现移动终端的输入和输出功能，具体此处不做限定。Optionally, the touch panel 971 may cover the display panel 961. When the touch panel 971 detects a touch operation on or near it, it transmits it to the processor 100 to determine the type of the touch event, and then the processor 100 determines the type of the touch event according to the touch event. The type provides corresponding visual output on the display panel 961. Although in FIG. 12, the touch panel 971 and the display panel 961 are used as two independent components to realize the input and output functions of the mobile terminal, in some embodiments, the touch panel 971 and the display panel 961 may be integrated The input and output functions of the mobile terminal are implemented, which is not specifically limited here.
接口单元98用作至少一个外部装置与移动终端90连接可以通过的接口。例如，外部装置可以包括有线或无线头戴式耳机端口、外部电源(或电池充电器)端口、有线或无线数据端口、存储卡端口、用于连接具有识别模块的装置的端口、音频输入/输出(I/O)端口、视频I/O端口、耳机端口等等。接口单元98可以用于接收来自外部装置的输入(例如，数据信息、电力等等)并且将接收到的输入传输到移动终端90内的一个或多个元件或者可以用于在移动终端90和外部装置之间传输数据。The interface unit 98 serves as an interface through which at least one external device can be connected to the mobile terminal 90 . For example, external devices may include wired or wireless headset ports, external power (or battery charger) ports, wired or wireless data ports, memory card ports, ports for connecting devices with identification modules, audio input/output (I/O) ports, video I/O ports, headphone ports, and more. The interface unit 98 may be used to receive input from external devices (eg, data information, power, etc.) and transmit the received input to one or more elements within the mobile terminal 90 or may be used to communicate between the mobile terminal 90 and the external Transfer data between devices.
存储器99可用于存储软件程序以及各种数据。存储器99可主要包括存储程序区和存储数据区，可选地，存储程序区可存储操作系统、至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能、图像播放功能等)等；存储数据区可存储根据手机的使用所创建的数据(比如音频数据、电话本等)等。此外，存储器99可以包括高速随机存取存储器，还可以包括非易失性存储器，例如至少一个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。The memory 99 may be used to store software programs as well as various data. The memory 99 may mainly include a storage program area and a storage data area. Optionally, the storage program area may store an operating system, an application program required for at least one function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.), and the like; the storage data area may Stores data (such as audio data, phonebook, etc.) created according to the use of the mobile phone, and the like. Additionally, memory 99 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one magnetic disk storage device, flash memory device, or other volatile solid state storage device.
处理器100是移动终端的控制中心，利用各种接口和线路连接整个移动终端的各个部分，通过运行或执行存储在存储器99内的软件程序和/或模块，以及调用存储在存储器99内的数据，执行移动终端的各种功能和处理数据，从而对移动终端进行整体监控。处理器100可包括一个或多个处理单元；优选的，处理器100可集成应用处理器和调制解调处理器，可选地，应用处理器主要处理操作系统、用户界面和应用程序等，调制解调处理器主要处理无线通信。可以理解的是，上述调制解调处理器也可以不集成到处理器100中。The processor 100 is the control center of the mobile terminal, uses various interfaces and lines to connect various parts of the entire mobile terminal, runs or executes the software programs and/or modules stored in the memory 99, and calls the data stored in the memory 99. , perform various functions of the mobile terminal and process data, so as to monitor the mobile terminal as a whole. The processor 100 may include one or more processing units; preferably, the processor 100 may integrate an application processor and a modem processor. The demodulation processor mainly handles wireless communication. It can be understood that, the above-mentioned modulation and demodulation processor may not be integrated into the processor 100.
移动终端90还可以包括给各个部件供电的电源101(比如电池)，优选的，电源101可以通过电源管理系统与处理器100逻辑相连，从而通过电源管理系统实现管理充电、放电、以及功耗管理等功能。The mobile terminal 90 may also include a power supply 101 (such as a battery) for supplying power to various components. Preferably, the power supply 101 may be logically connected to the processor 100 through a power management system, so as to manage charging, discharging, and power consumption management through the power management system and other functions.
尽管图12未示出，移动终端90还可以包括蓝牙模块等，在此不再赘述。Although not shown in FIG. 12 , the mobile terminal 90 may also include a Bluetooth module, etc., which will not be described herein again.
为了便于理解本申请实施例，下面对本申请的移动终端所基于的通信网络系统进行描述。To facilitate understanding of the embodiments of the present application, a communication network system on which the mobile terminal of the present application is based is described below.
请参阅图13，图13为本申请实施例提供的一种通信网络系统架构图，该通信网络系统为通用移动通信技术的LTE系统，该LTE系统包括依次通讯连接的UE(User Equipment，用户设备)11，E-UTRAN(Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network，演进式UMTS陆地无线接入网)12，EPC(Evolved Packet Core，演进式分组核心网)13和运营商的IP业务14。Please refer to FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is an architecture diagram of a communication network system provided by an embodiment of the application. The communication network system is an LTE system of universal mobile communication technology. ) 11, E-UTRAN (Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network, Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network) 12, EPC (Evolved Packet Core, Evolved Packet Core) 13 and the operator's IP service 14.
可选地，UE11可以是上述移动终端90，此处不再赘述。Optionally, the UE11 may be the above-mentioned mobile terminal 90, which will not be repeated here.
E-UTRAN 12包括eNodeB 121和其它eNodeB 122等。可选地，eNodeB 121可以通过回程(backhaul)(例如X2接口)与其它eNodeB 122连接，eNodeB 121连接到EPC 13，eNodeB 121可以提供UE 11到EPC 13的接入。 E-UTRAN 12 includes eNodeB 121 and other eNodeBs 122 and the like. Optionally, the eNodeB 121 may be connected to other eNodeBs 122 through a backhaul (eg X2 interface), the eNodeB 121 is connected to the EPC 13, and the eNodeB 121 may provide UE 11 access to the EPC 13.
EPC 13可以包括MME(Mobility Management Entity，移动性管理实体)131，HSS(Home Subscriber Server，归属用户服务器)132，其它MME 133，SGW(Serving Gate Way，服务网关)134，PGW(PDN Gate Way，分组数据网络网关)135和PCRF(Policy and Charging Rules Function，政策和资费功能实体)136等。可选地，MME 131是处理UE 11和EPC 13之间信令的控制节点，提供承载和连接管理。HSS 132用于提供一些寄存器来管理诸如归属位置寄存器(图中未示)之类的功能，并且保存有一些有关服务特征、数据速率等用户专用的信息。所有用户数据都可以通过SGW 134进行发送，PGW 135可以提供UE 11的IP地址分配以及其它功能，PCRF 136是业务数据流和IP承载资源的策略与计费控制策略决策点，它为策略与计费执行功能单元(图中未示)选择及提供可用的策略和计费控制决策。 EPC 13 may include MME (Mobility Management Entity, mobility management entity) 131, HSS (Home Subscriber Server, home subscriber server) 132, other MME 133, SGW (Serving Gate Way, serving gateway) 134, PGW (PDN Gate Way, Packet data network gateway) 135 and PCRF (Policy and Charging Rules Function, policy and charging functional entity) 136 and so on. Optionally, MME 131 is a control node that handles signaling between UE 11 and EPC 13, providing bearer and connection management. The HSS 132 is used to provide registers to manage functions such as a home location register (not shown), and to store user-specific information about service characteristics, data rates, and the like. All user data can be sent through SGW 134, PGW 135 can provide IP address allocation and other functions for UE 11, PCRF 136 is the policy and charging control policy decision point for service data flow and IP bearer resources, it is the policy and accounting A charge enforcement functional unit (not shown) selects and provides available policy and charge control decisions.
IP业务14可以包括因特网、内联网、IMS(IP Multimedia Subsystem，IP多媒体子系统)或其它IP业务等。The IP service 14 may include the Internet, an intranet, an IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem, IP Multimedia Subsystem) or other IP services and the like.
虽然上述以LTE系统为例进行了介绍，但本领域技术人员应当知晓，本申请不仅仅适用于LTE系统，也可以适用于其他无线通信系统，例如GSM、CDMA2000、WCDMA、TD-SCDMA以及未来新的网络系统等，此处不做限定。Although the above takes the LTE system as an example, those skilled in the art should know that this application is not only applicable to the LTE system, but also applicable to other wireless communication systems, such as GSM, CDMA2000, WCDMA, TD-SCDMA and future new The network system, etc., is not limited here.
为了更好理解本申请各个实施例，可参考上述移动终端硬件结构以及通信网络系统。For a better understanding of the various embodiments of the present application, reference may be made to the above-mentioned mobile terminal hardware structure and communication network system.
以上仅为本申请的优选实施例，并非因此限制本申请的专利范围，凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效结构或等效流程变换，或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域，均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。The above are only the preferred embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the patent scope of the present application. Any equivalent structure or equivalent process transformation made by using the contents of the description and drawings of the present application, or directly or indirectly applied in other related technical fields , are similarly included within the scope of patent protection of this application.

Claims (37)

  1. 一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，应用于终端设备，包括以下步骤：An information processing method, characterized in that, applied to a terminal device, comprising the following steps:
    获取终端群组偏移信息，其中，所述终端群组偏移信息用于调整所述终端设备所属的终端群组；acquiring terminal group offset information, wherein the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
    基于所述终端群组偏移信息，根据预设策略确定所述终端设备所属的目标终端群组。Based on the terminal group offset information, a target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs is determined according to a preset policy.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是根据与所述终端设备有关的通信行为确定的。The method according to claim 1, wherein the terminal group offset information is determined according to a communication behavior related to the terminal device.
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述通信行为包括以下至少一种：The method according to claim 2, wherein the communication behavior comprises at least one of the following:
    预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
    终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
    预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  4. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据预设策略确定所述终端设备所属的目标终端群组，包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the determining, according to a preset policy, a target terminal group to which the terminal device belongs includes at least one of the following:
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息及所述终端设备的标识信息，确定所述目标终端群组；determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal device;
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息及所述终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定所述目标终端群组；determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定所述目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：The method according to claim 4, wherein the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
    5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
    国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
  6. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
    无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
    非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，包括以下至少一种：The method of claim 6, comprising at least one of the following:
    所述无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令；The radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling;
    所述非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。The non-access stratum signaling includes: configuration update command or registration acceptance signaling.
  8. 根据权利要求1至3中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising at least one of the following:
    所述目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同；The paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same;
    所述终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态；the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state;
    接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Receive the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
  9. 一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，应用于终端设备，包括以下步骤：An information processing method, characterized in that, applied to a terminal device, comprising the following steps:
    接收目标信息，所述目标信息携带有终端群组指示信息；receiving target information, where the target information carries terminal group indication information;
    确认所述终端群组是否为目标终端群组，其中，所述目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，所述终端群组偏移信息用于调整所述终端设备所属的终端群组；Confirming whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, wherein the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs ;
    若是，则基于所述目标终端群组进行相应处理。If yes, perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group.
  10. 根据权利要9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标信息包括以下至少一种：The method according to claim 9, wherein the target information includes at least one of the following:
    唤醒信号；wake-up signal;
    寻呼指示。paging indication.
  11. 根据权利要9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：The method according to claim 9, wherein the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
    无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
    非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，包括以下至少一种：The method of claim 11, comprising at least one of the following:
    所述无线资源控制信令包括以下至少一种：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令；The radio resource control signaling includes at least one of the following: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling;
    所述非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。The non-access stratum signaling includes: configuration update command or registration acceptance signaling.
  13. 根据权利要9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述目标终端群组进行相应处理，包括以下至少一种：The method according to claim 9, wherein the performing corresponding processing based on the target terminal group comprises at least one of the following:
    依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，监听物理下行控制信道；Monitor the physical downlink control channel according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
    依据唤醒信号所指示的终端群组信息，接收短消息；Receive short messages according to the terminal group information indicated by the wake-up signal;
    依据寻呼指示所指示的终端群组信息，解析物理下行共享信道。The physical downlink shared channel is parsed according to the terminal group information indicated by the paging indication.
  14. 根据权利要9至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：The method according to any one of claims 9 to 13, wherein the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
    预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
    终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
    预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  15. 根据权利要求9至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标终端群组信息基于终端群组偏移信息确定，包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 9 to 13, wherein the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, comprising at least one of the following:
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息及所述终端设备的标识信息，确定所述目标终端群组；determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal device;
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息及所述终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定所述目标终端群组；determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定所述目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：The method according to claim 15, wherein the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
    5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
    国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
  17. 根据权利要求9至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 9 to 13, further comprising at least one of the following:
    所述目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同；The paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same;
    所述终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态；the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state;
    接收重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Receive the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile subscriber identity.
  18. 一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，应用于网络设备，包括以下步骤：An information processing method, characterized in that, applied to a network device, comprising the following steps:
    判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；Determine whether the preset parameters of the terminal device meet the preset conditions;
    若是，根据所述预设参数确定所述终端设备的终端群组偏移信息，所述终端群组偏移信息用于调整所述终端设备所属的终端群组。If so, the terminal group offset information of the terminal device is determined according to the preset parameter, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法，其特征在于，包括以下至少一种：The method of claim 18, comprising at least one of the following:
    所述预设参数是与所述终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数；The preset parameter is a relevant parameter of the communication behavior related to the terminal device;
    所述预设条件为至少一所述预设参数的值大于预设值。The preset condition is that a value of at least one of the preset parameters is greater than a preset value.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述通信行为包括以下至少一种：The method according to claim 19, wherein the communication behavior comprises at least one of the following:
    预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset time period;
    终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
    预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  21. 根据权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：The method according to any one of claims 18 to 20, further comprising:
    发送所述终端群组偏移信息。Send the terminal group offset information.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：The method according to claim 21, wherein the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
    无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
    非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，包括以下至少一种：The method of claim 22, comprising at least one of the following:
    所述无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令；The radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling;
    所述非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。The non-access stratum signaling includes: configuration update command or registration acceptance signaling.
  24. 根据权利要求18至20中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 18 to 20, further comprising at least one of the following:
    所述终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同；The paging occasions of each terminal device in the terminal group are the same;
    所述终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态；the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state;
    发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  25. 一种信息处理方法，其特征在于，应用于网络设备，包括以下步骤：An information processing method, characterized in that, applied to a network device, comprising the following steps:
    判断终端设备的预设参数是否符合预设条件；Determine whether the preset parameters of the terminal device meet the preset conditions;
    若是，发送目标信息，所述目标信息携带有所述终端设备所属的终端群组的指示信息；If so, send target information, where the target information carries indication information of the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs;
    确认所述终端群组是否为目标终端群组，其中，所述目标终端群组基于终端群组偏移信息确定，所述终端群组偏移信息用于调整所述终端设备所属的终端群组；Confirming whether the terminal group is a target terminal group, wherein the target terminal group is determined based on terminal group offset information, and the terminal group offset information is used to adjust the terminal group to which the terminal device belongs ;
    若是，则基于所述目标终端群组进行相应处理。If yes, perform corresponding processing based on the target terminal group.
  26. 根据权利要25所述的方法，其特征在于，包括以下至少一种：The method of claim 25, comprising at least one of the following:
    所述预设参数是与所述终端设备有关的通信行为的相关参数；The preset parameter is a relevant parameter of the communication behavior related to the terminal device;
    所述预设条件为至少一所述预设参数的值大于预设值；The preset condition is that the value of at least one of the preset parameters is greater than a preset value;
    所述目标信息包括以下至少一种：唤醒信号、寻呼指示。The target information includes at least one of the following: a wake-up signal and a paging indication.
  27. 根据权利要25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是通过以下至少一种进行携带：The method according to claim 25, wherein the terminal group offset information is carried by at least one of the following:
    无线资源控制信令；radio resource control signaling;
    非接入层信令。Non-access stratum signaling.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，包括以下至少一种：The method of claim 27, comprising at least one of the following:
    所述无线资源控制信令包括：无线资源控制重配置信令、无线资源控制释放信令或无线资源控制恢复信令；The radio resource control signaling includes: radio resource control reconfiguration signaling, radio resource control release signaling or radio resource control recovery signaling;
    所述非接入层信令包括：配置更新命令或注册接受信令。The non-access stratum signaling includes: configuration update command or registration acceptance signaling.
  29. 根据权利要25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基于所述目标终端群组进行相应处理，包括以下至少一种：The method according to claim 25, wherein the performing corresponding processing based on the target terminal group comprises at least one of the following:
    基于所述目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送包含寻呼无线网络临时标识的信息；Based on the target terminal group, send information including a paging wireless network temporary identity through a physical downlink control channel;
    基于所述目标终端群组，通过物理下行控制信道发送短信息；based on the target terminal group, sending short messages through a physical downlink control channel;
    基于所述目标终端群组，通过物理共享控制信道发送寻呼消息。Based on the target terminal group, the paging message is sent through the physical shared control channel.
  30. 根据权利要25至29中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端群组偏移信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：The method according to any one of claims 25 to 29, wherein the terminal group offset information is determined according to at least one of the following:
    预设时长内寻呼终端设备的次数；The number of times the terminal equipment is paged within the preset duration;
    终端群组个数的配置更新；Configuration update of the number of terminal groups;
    预设时长内终端设备被寻呼或唤醒的概率。The probability that the terminal device is paged or woken up within a preset time period.
  31. 根据权利要求25至29中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标终端群组信息基于终端群组偏移信息确定，包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 25 to 29, wherein the target terminal group information is determined based on terminal group offset information, including at least one of the following:
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息及所述终端设备的标识信息，确定所述目标终端群组；determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the identification information of the terminal device;
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息及所述终端设备当前所属的终端群组，确定所述目标终端群组；determining the target terminal group according to the terminal group offset information and the terminal group to which the terminal device currently belongs;
    根据所述终端群组偏移信息、终端设备的标识信息及用于分组的参数，确定所述目标终端群组。The target terminal group is determined according to the terminal group offset information, the identification information of the terminal equipment and the parameters used for grouping.
  32. 根据权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，所述终端设备的标识信息是根据以下至少一种确定的：The method according to claim 31, wherein the identification information of the terminal device is determined according to at least one of the following:
    5G服务临时移动用户标识；5G service temporary mobile user identity;
    国际移动用户识别码。International Mobile Subscriber Identity.
  33. 根据权利要求25至29中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括以下至少一种：The method according to any one of claims 25 to 29, further comprising at least one of the following:
    所述目标终端群组内各终端设备的寻呼时机相同；The paging occasions of each terminal device in the target terminal group are the same;
    所述终端设备处于非激活态或空闲态或连接态；the terminal device is in an inactive state or an idle state or a connected state;
    发送重配置的5G服务临时移动用户标识。Send the reconfigured 5G service temporary mobile user identity.
  34. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：A communication system, comprising:
    用于执行如权利要求1或9所述方法的终端设备；A terminal device for performing the method according to claim 1 or 9;
    用于执行如权利要求18或25所述方法的网络设备。A network device for performing the method of claim 18 or 25.
  35. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括：存储器和处理器；A communication device, comprising: a memory and a processor;
    所述存储器用于存储程序指令；the memory is used to store program instructions;
    所述处理器用于调用所述存储器中的程序指令以执行如权利要求1或9或18或25所述的方法。The processor is adapted to invoke program instructions in the memory to perform the method of claim 1 or 9 or 18 or 25.
  36. 一种可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述可读存储介质上存储有计算机程序；所述计算机程序被执行时，实现如权利要求1或9或18或25所述的方法。A readable storage medium, characterized in that a computer program is stored on the readable storage medium; when the computer program is executed, the method according to claim 1 or 9 or 18 or 25 is implemented.
  37. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，包括计算机程序，所述计算机程序在被执行时，实现如权利要求1或9或18或25所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized by comprising a computer program which, when executed, implements the method according to claim 1 or 9 or 18 or 25.
PCT/CN2021/075049 2021-02-03 2021-02-03 Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium WO2022165665A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/075049 WO2022165665A1 (en) 2021-02-03 2021-02-03 Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium
CN202180091939.1A CN116965106A (en) 2021-02-03 2021-02-03 Information processing method, device, system and storage medium

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2021/075049 WO2022165665A1 (en) 2021-02-03 2021-02-03 Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022165665A1 true WO2022165665A1 (en) 2022-08-11

Family

ID=82740735

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/075049 WO2022165665A1 (en) 2021-02-03 2021-02-03 Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN116965106A (en)
WO (1) WO2022165665A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110134893A1 (en) * 2008-08-25 2011-06-09 Gi Won Park Method of transmitting and receiving paging information
CN102119539A (en) * 2008-08-10 2011-07-06 Lg电子株式会社 Method for performing location update of mobile station in idle mode
US20140295896A1 (en) * 2013-03-26 2014-10-02 Korea Advanced Institute Of Science And Technology Method and apparatus for operating idle mode in wireless communication systems
CN110536382A (en) * 2018-08-10 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 It is grouped processing method, device, base station, terminal and the storage medium of wake-up signal
CN110944371A (en) * 2018-09-25 2020-03-31 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Paging configuration adjustment method, terminal, network equipment and storage medium

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102119539A (en) * 2008-08-10 2011-07-06 Lg电子株式会社 Method for performing location update of mobile station in idle mode
US20110134893A1 (en) * 2008-08-25 2011-06-09 Gi Won Park Method of transmitting and receiving paging information
US20140295896A1 (en) * 2013-03-26 2014-10-02 Korea Advanced Institute Of Science And Technology Method and apparatus for operating idle mode in wireless communication systems
CN110536382A (en) * 2018-08-10 2019-12-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 It is grouped processing method, device, base station, terminal and the storage medium of wake-up signal
CN110944371A (en) * 2018-09-25 2020-03-31 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 Paging configuration adjustment method, terminal, network equipment and storage medium

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116965106A (en) 2023-10-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP3914000B1 (en) Paging indication method, paging method, terminal and network side device
WO2020147823A1 (en) Terminal capability negotiation method, terminal device and network-side device
US12069608B2 (en) Paging indication method, apparatus, and system
WO2020253612A1 (en) Pdcch monitoring method and terminal
WO2020207435A1 (en) Measurement method, measurement configuration method, terminal and network device
US20210360636A1 (en) Method for transmitting indication signal, terminal and network device
WO2021129508A1 (en) Wake up signal processing method, wake up signal configuration method, and related device
WO2020020058A1 (en) Measurement method, terminal and network side device
WO2019184858A1 (en) Method for monitoring paging message, mobile terminal, and server
US20220141745A1 (en) Network switching method and terminal
WO2019184859A1 (en) Method for reporting ue capabilities, detection method, mobile terminal and server
WO2021180197A1 (en) Transmission configuration method and electronic device
EP4087283A1 (en) Multicast service transmission method, transmission processing method, and related device
WO2019184945A1 (en) Method for detecting ue capability, method for reporting ue capability, mobile terminal, and server
WO2019095917A1 (en) Slot format indication detection method and configuration method and device
US11219071B2 (en) System information transmission method and user terminal
WO2021027921A1 (en) Handover configuration method, network device, terminal device, and storage medium
US20230014481A1 (en) Service receiving method and service configuration method, terminal, and network-side device
WO2022165665A1 (en) Information processing method, device and system, and storage medium
WO2023082603A1 (en) Reminding method, terminal device, network device and storage medium
US20220022198A1 (en) Method for radio link monitoring, terminal, base station, and storage medium
WO2021228074A1 (en) Information detection method, and information sending method, terminal, and network side device
WO2020244477A1 (en) Sending method and receiving method for network identification information, and communication device
WO2021018282A1 (en) Network switching method, network device, and terminal
WO2020063282A1 (en) Information indication method, indication receiving method, terminal, and network-side device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21923693

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202180091939.1

Country of ref document: CN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: NOTING OF LOSS OF RIGHTS PURSUANT TO RULE 112(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A DATED 11/12/2023)

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21923693

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1